Programme Specification
IS MSc Information and Knowledge Management
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Accredited by the Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals |
Final award | MSc/PGDip/PGCert |
Programme title | Information and Knowledge Management |
Programme code | ISPT37/38 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is one calendar year full-time. The minimum period of study for the award of PGDip is nine months full-time. The minimum period of study for the award of PGCert is one semester, full-time. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Develop a critical understanding of the professional, managerial, cognitive, ethical, legal and technical dimensions of information management and knowledge management;
- Develop and apply advanced abilities in collecting, assimilating and using information and knowledge resources in support of specific organisational objectives;
- Acquire critical reading and research skills appropriate to researching issues of information and knowledge management within the workplace;
- Complete a self-directed and managed piece of research exploring the dimensions of information and knowledge management relevant to current business practice;
- Analyse the changing theoretical context in which research on information and knowledge management has developed;
- Enhance employment skills, with particular reference to employment in positions where awareness of information and knowledge management is essential.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007)
- CILIP’s Body of Professional Knowledge: Guide for Course Designers (November 2004: )
- ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ, Learning and Teaching Strategy (
- ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Department of Information Science, Learning and Teaching Strategy
- QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
- the current theories, principles and practice of information and knowledge management
- the history, concepts and antecedents of knowledge management and its current role in organisations
- the development and implementation of information and knowledge management policies and strategies
- the importance of intellectual capital, combined with its ethical management and exploitation within organisations
- the importance of relevant technologies, combined with human resource management strategies, change management and organisational culture as an integral part of successful information and knowledge management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
- Evaluate the range of methods available in order to critically analyse tangible and intangible knowledge assets in an organisation
- Apply technical and managerial concepts, theories and evidence to demonstrate a conceptual understanding of alternative information and knowledge management practices in an organisation
- Demonstrate initiative and originality by applying appropriate theory, practices and tools for the specification, design and implementation of information and knowledge management systems, including the use of Intranets and collaborative technological tools
- Demonstrate a level of conceptual understanding in order to critically evaluate how knowledge bases are constructed, organised and maintained, utilising knowledge from the forefront of the discipline
- Apply expert information searching and retrieval skills, as well as those skills essential to effective information and knowledge organisation and retrieval, including the use of metadata and taxonomies
- Act autonomously in planning and successfully completing an original piece of research on information and knowledge management at a high professional and academic level, dovetailing both theoretical rigour and solid analysis.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
- Critically read, evaluate and summarise current academic debates pertaining to information and knowledge management
- Successfully model the design of an effective information portal using appropriate practical techniques and tools
- Critically evaluate and select a range of information and knowledge management systems and solutions using a structured feature analysis process
- Successfully analyse and interpret business intelligence data to solve a range of information and knowledge management problems via quantitative techniques
- Manage the research process, conducting research in a way that is consistent with both professional practice and the principles of research ethics.
c. Key transferable skills:
- Communication skills: writing, dissemination and media skills
- Oral presentation skills for seminars, workshops, business meetings and conferences
- Research management and time management skills
- Bibliographic and computing skills
- Decision-making ability in complex and unpredictable situations
- Management and leadership skills
- Independent learning ability required for continuing professional development
4. Programme structure
To be eligible for consideration for these awards, students must have studied the following modules:
Semester One
All compulsory modules
|
Title |
Credit Value |
ISP509 |
Business Intelligence and Analysis |
15 |
ISP487 |
Principles of Information and Knowledge Management |
15 |
ISP503 |
Information Architecture |
15 |
ISP535 |
Research Management |
15 |
Semester Two
All compulsory modules
|
Title |
Credit Value |
ISP501 |
Information Retrieval for Knowledge Management |
15 |
COP400 |
Web Design and Web Analytics |
15 |
COP453 |
Information Systems and Modelling |
15 |
ISP310 |
Leadership and Change Management |
15 |
ISP600/601 |
Dissertation (full or part-time) |
60 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XXI for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any module other than ISP600 or ISP601 to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
IS MSc Information Management and Business Technology
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/PGDip/PGCert |
Programme title | Information Management and Business Technology |
Programme code | BSPT07/08 |
Length of programme | This programme is available by full-time or part-time study. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is one calendar year full-time; the minimum period of study for the award of PGDip is nine months full-time; the minimum period of study for the award of PGCert is one semester full-time. Part-time study requires completion within the following times: MSc – 8 years, PGDip – 5 years, PGCert – 3 years. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Acquire critical technological and analytical skills appropriate to effective workplace performance in the implementation and leadership of information management and business technology initiatives;
- Develop a critical understanding of the role and significance of both being an information technology specialist and a business generalist;
- Complete a self-directed and managed piece of research exploring the relationship of information management and business technologies;
- Develop a critical understanding of the ongoing impacts of both information management and business technology perspectives on the workplace;
- Enhance employment skills, with particular reference to employment in positions where knowledge of and skills in information management and business technology are essential.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for:
Librarianship, information, knowledge, records and archives management (2014)
- The Response of The Library Association to the Institute for Learning and Teaching The National Framework for Higher Education Teaching ()
- ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ, Learning and Teaching Strategy
()
- ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ School of Business and Economics, Learning and Teaching Strategy
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland
- Annual and Periodic Programme Review
- External Examiners' reports
- Staff-Student committees
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
- the principles and practice of information and business technology management
- the relationship between traditionally technology-independent areas of an organisation and non-technical business areas
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
- Appreciate the range of methods used to manage the relationship between traditionally technology-independent areas of an organisation and non-technical business areas
- Understand, by applying appropriate theory, practices and tools for the specification, design and implementation of information systems
- Understand, by applying technical and managerial concepts, theories and evidence to analyse business information and knowledge networks within organisations
- Understand information and knowledge management policies and strategies that enhance effectiveness in organisations
- Successfully complete an original piece of research on information management and business technology dovetailing both theoretical rigour and solid analysis
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
- Critically evaluate and select management tools and techniques for a given project
- Successfully model the requirements of information systems using appropriate modelling tools
- Manage and assess user requirements for collaborative technologies using a range of qualitative methods
- Successfully apply a systems approach to problem structuring and problem solving within a business enterprise framework
- Manage the process of identifying and documenting risks associated with the development process and with target systems
c. Key transferable skills:
- Communication skills: writing, dissemination and media skills
- Oral presentation skills for seminars, workshops and conferences
- Research management and time management skills
- Bibliographic and computing skills
- Decision-making ability in complex and unpredictable situations
- Independent learning ability required for continuing professional development.
4. Programme structure
To be eligible for consideration for these awards, students must have studied the following modules:
Semester One
All compulsory modules
ISP485 |
Supporting Collaborative Work through Technology |
15 |
ISP486 |
Information Architecture |
15 |
ISP488 |
Management of IT Systems |
15 |
ISP490 |
Business Relationships Management |
15 |
Semester Two
All compulsory modules
ISP483 |
Project Management and Leadership |
15 |
ISP484 |
Information and Social Network Analysis |
15 |
ISP489 |
Managing Knowledge in Organisations |
15 |
ISP491 |
Business Technologies and Platforms |
15 |
ISP700/701 |
Dissertation (full or part-time) |
60 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XXI for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any module other than ISP700 or ISP701 to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Human Resource Management/Employment Relations and Human Resource Management
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc |
Programme title | Human Resource Management/Employment Relations and Human Resource Management |
Programme code | BSPT18/BSPT19 |
Length of programme | |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | Minimum upper second class honours degree (2:1) in either business, management or a cognate social science (sociology, psychology, economics), or a degree in another subject with a substantial business or social science component, from a UK university or equivalent overseas qualification recognised by ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ. Applications from those with a lower second class degree or from a different disciplinary background may be considered if the applicant has relevant work experience. English language requirements for international students: IELTS: overall 6.5 with minimum 6.0 in each component. The School will accept lower IELTS scores if you undertake the University's pre-sessional English course. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
Programme Aims:
-
To provide market led programmes informed by the latest research and developments in the fields of HR and employment relations.
-
To foster in graduates the capacity for reflective practice, and professional and personal development so that they are able to contribute effectively to the leadership and management of business, organisations and society.
-
To provide graduates with advanced understanding of the social science theory and evidence that underpins people management practice, allowing students to meet the knowledge requirements for chartered membership of the Chartered Institute for Personnel and Development.
For Msc HRM
-
To develop graduates with the capacity to undertake advanced analyse and critically evaluation of contemporary issues in the field of HR and people management.
For Msc Employment Relations
-
To develop graduates with the capacity to undertake advanced analyse and critically evaluation of contemporary issues related to the regulation and management of the employment relationship.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
QAA Framework for Higher Education Qualifications, Masters Degrees
-
QAA subject benchmark for Masters degrees in business and management
-
CIPD advanced level qualification module content summaries
-
ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ “Building Excellence” Strategy Document
-
School of Business and Economics Strategic Plan
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of the programmes, students should be able to:
MSc HRM:
-
Critically appraise key theories of leadership, motivation, commitment, engagement and change management in relation to people management and the related empirical evidence.
-
Critically discuss the role of the human resource management function in organisational life, including the role of context and environment in shaping this.
-
Debate and synthesise the ethical issues involved in people management.
-
Demonstrate advanced understanding of the key skills required for a successful career as an HR practitioner.
-
Demonstrate a critical understanding of philosophies and methods of social science research as they pertain to the fields of HR and employment relations.
MSc in Employment Relations and HRM:
-
Critically appraise key theories of leadership, motivation, commitment, engagement and change management in relation to people management and the related empirical evidence.
-
Critically discuss the role of the human resource management function in organisational life, including the role of context and environment in shaping this.
-
Debate and synthesise the ethical issues involved in people management.
-
Demonstrate advanced understanding of the key skills required for a successful career as an HR practitioner.
-
Demonstrate a critical understanding of philosophies and methods of social science research as they pertain to the fields of HR and employment relations.
-
Critically appraise key theories of the employment relationship and related empirical evidence.
-
Demonstrate a critical understanding of the principles and practical application of UK employment law.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
Analyse and offer solutions to people management problems and issues.
-
Synthesise issues and themes from the professional and academic literatures on people management.
For MSc HRM
-
Critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to HRM practice.
For MSc in Employment Relations and HRM
-
Critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to the regulation of the employment relationship.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
Presenting information for a business audience in a concise and coherent manner.
-
Interpret and work with financial data and information.
-
Demonstrate the foundation skills for professional competence in key HR activities, including interviewing, negotiation, project management, leadership and the delivery of training.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
Critically analyse and evaluate complex topics
-
Formulate arguments from an extensive range of theory and evidence.
-
Demonstrate effective personal organisation, including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision making, and written and oral communication.
-
Use effective team working skills including leadership, team building and project management.
-
Apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations.
-
Demonstrate the capacity to reflect critically on own practice and update skills and knowledge through CPD.
4. Programme structure
MSc HRM |
MSc Employment Relations and HRM |
Semester 1 |
|
BSP450 HRM: Theory and Practice BSP451 Developing Skills for Business Leadership
Choice of two of: BSP455 Employment Relations OR BSP402 Wellbeing and Work
BSP400 Leadership and Performance Management* BSP401 Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice* BSP403 Work Design, Organisational Change and Development*
|
BSP450 HRM: Theory and Practice BSP451 Developing Skills for Business Leadership BSP455 Employment Relations
Choice of one of: BSP400 Leadership and Performance Management* BSP401 Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice* BSP403 Work Design, Organisational Change and Development*
|
Semester 2 |
|
BSP452 Strategic HRM BSP453 Research Methods for HRM
Choice of two of: BSP454 Employment Law* OR
BSP405 Psychological Developement in Organisations
BSP407 Learning, Development and Knowledge Management* BSP406 Career Development
|
BSP452 Strategic HRM BSP453 Research Methods for HRM BSP454 Employment Law
Choice of one of: BSP407 Learning, Development and Knowledge Management* BSP406 Career Development
|
Summer |
|
BSP456 HRM Dissertation (60 credits) |
BSP457 Employment Relations Dissertation (60 credits) |
All modules are 15 credits unless otherwise stated.
Students on the MSc HRM must take at least two of the modules marked with *
Students on the MSc ER and HRM must take at least one of the modules marked with *
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 Students seeking CIPD accrediatation must also obtain marks of not less than 50 for the following CIPD mapped modules:
BSP450 HRM: Theory and Practice;
BSP451 Developing Skills for Business Leadership;
BSP452 Strategic HRM;
BSP456 or BSP457 Dissertation
and in at least two of:
BSP455 Employment Relations
BSP401 Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice
BSP403 Work Design, Organisational Change and Development
BSP407 Learning, Development and Knowledge Management
5.3 Candidates who have a right to re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.
5.4 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
The percentage mark for each module will be combined in a credit-weighted average to determine the final percentage mark.
Programme Specification
BS MSc Finance/ MSc Finance and Investment/ MSc Corporate Finance
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc |
Programme title | Finance/ Finance and Investment/ Corporate Finance |
Programme code | BSPT28 MSc Corporate Finance, BSPT29 MSc Finance, BSPT27 MSc Finance and Investment |
Length of programme | |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/finance/ http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/finance-investment/ http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/corporate-finance/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide a programme informed by current developments in finance, which is practically relevant.
- To develop a comprehensive understanding of finance theory and its application.
- To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work effectively and to contribute to business and society
For MSc Finance
- To provide graduates with appropriate tools of analysis to critically evaluate complex financial issues both systematically and creatively, to improve financial practice.
For MSc Finance and Investment
- To provide graduates with appropriate tools of analysis to critically evaluate complex investment issues both systematically and creatively, to improve the practice of risk measurement and investment management.
For MSc Corporate Finance
- To provide graduates with appropriate tools of analysis to critically evaluate complex corporate financial issues both systematically and creatively, to improve corporate treasury management practice.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
QAA Framework for Higher Education Qualifications, Master’s Degrees
-
QAA Finance Subject Benchmark Statement
-
ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ “Building Excellence” Strategy Document
-
School of Business and Economics Strategic Plan
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
For MSc Finance
K1 appraise the core theories of finance and assess the empirical evidence on these
K2 critically discuss the financing arrangements and governance structures of business entities
K3 evaluate the factors influencing investment behaviour
K4 demonstrate a critical awareness of how financial markets operate in different settings
K5 debate the role of finance in society and the wider economy
For MSc Finance and Investment
K1-5
K6 debate and critically assess complex investment issues including risk measurement and investment management.
For MSc Corporate Finance
K1-5
K7 debate and critically assess complex corporate finance issues in corporate treasury management and executive financial decision making.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1 analyse and solve theoretical and practical problems in finance
C2 synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in finance
For MSc Finance
C3 critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to finance
For MSc Finance and Investment
C4 critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to investment practice.
For MSc Corporate Finance
C5 critically evaluate arguments and evidence related to the practice of treasury management.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1 prepare reports suitable for a professional audience
P2 collect and analyse relevant financial data using appropriate techniques
P3 use appropriate analytical and professional tools in complex financial scenarios
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
T1 critically analyse and evaluate complex topics
T2 formulate key arguments from an extensive range of evidence
T3 demonstrate advanced skills in numeracy ( Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques)
T4 apply logical thinking and problem solving in unstructured situations
T5 use advanced information technology (e.g. handling of large data sets, multifaceted information retrieval and spread-sheet methods)
T6 demonstrate effective personal organisation including time management, independent study, self-direction, decision-making and written and oral communication
T7 use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management
4. Programme structure
4.1 MSc Finance
Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP420 |
Methods for Financial Data Analysis |
15 |
1 |
BSP421 |
Principles of Finance |
15 |
1 |
BSP422 |
Financial Markets and Institutions |
15 |
1 |
BSP423 |
Financial Reporting and Company Performance |
15 |
1 |
BSP424 |
Corporate Finance |
15 |
2 |
BSP425 |
Portfolio Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP429 |
Business Communication for Finance |
15 |
1 & 2 |
BSP434 |
Corporate Governance and Responsibility |
15 |
3 |
Option Modules.
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose Four optional Modules (total modular weight 60). Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30) will be taken in Semester 2 and chosen from List A and List B below. At least one option must be chosen from List A. Two optional Modules (total modular weight 30) will be taken in Semester 3 and chosen from List C.
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
List A |
|||
BSP426 |
International Financial Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP427 |
Financial Statements and Business Valuation |
15 |
2 |
BSP428 |
Derivatives and Risk Management |
15 |
2 |
List B |
|||
BSP430 |
Global Financial Markets and the Financial Crisis |
15 |
2 |
BSP024 |
Business Economics |
15 |
2 |
BSP041 |
Small Business and Entrepreneurship |
15 |
2 |
List C |
|||
BSP431 |
Corporate Financial Analysis |
15 |
3 |
BSP432 |
Global Investment Analysis |
15 |
3 |
BSP433 |
Advanced Corporate Finance |
15 |
3 |
BSP435 |
Financial Trading |
15 |
3 |
4.2 MSc Finance and Investment
Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP420 |
Methods for Financial Data Analysis |
15 |
1 |
BSP421 |
Principles of Finance |
15 |
1 |
BSP422 |
Financial Markets and Institutions |
15 |
1 |
BSP423 |
Financial Reporting and Company Performance |
15 |
1 |
BSP425 |
Portfolio Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP427 |
Financial Statements and Business Valuation |
15 |
2 |
BSP428 |
Derivatives and Risk Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP429 |
Business Communication for Finance |
15 |
1 & 2 |
BSP432 |
Global Investment Analysis |
15 |
3 |
BSP434 |
Corporate Governance and Responsibility |
15 |
3 |
BSP435 |
Financial Trading |
15 |
3 |
Semester 2 Option Modules.
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose One optional Modules, (total modular weight 15) to be chosen from the list below.
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
BSP424 |
Corporate Finance |
15 |
BSP426 |
International Financial Management |
15 |
BSP430 |
Global Financial Markets and the Financial Crisis |
15 |
BSP024 |
Business Economics |
15 |
ECP158 |
Applied Banking and Financial Modelling |
15 |
4.3 MSc Corporate Finance
Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP420 |
Methods for Financial Data Analysis |
15 |
1 |
BSP421 |
Principles of Finance |
15 |
1 |
BSP422 |
Financial Markets and Institutions |
15 |
1 |
BSP423 |
Financial Reporting and Company Performance |
15 |
1 |
BSP424 |
Corporate Finance |
15 |
2 |
BSP426 |
International Financial Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP427 |
Financial Statements and Business Valuation |
15 |
2 |
BSP429 |
Business Communication for Finance |
15 |
1 & 2 |
BSP431 |
Corporate Financial Analysis |
15 |
3 |
BSP433 |
Advanced Corporate Finance |
15 |
3 |
BSP434 |
Corporate Governance and Responsibility |
15 |
3 |
Semester 2 Option Modules.
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose One optional Modules, (total modular weight 15) to be chosen from the list below.
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
BSP425 |
Portfolio Management |
15 |
BSP430 |
Global Financial Markets and the Financial Crisis |
15 |
BSP024 |
Business Economics |
15 |
BSP041 |
Small Business and Entrepreneurship |
15 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.
5.3 All examinations must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Work Psychology
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc |
Programme title | Work Psychology |
Programme code | BSPT39 (f/t) BSPT36 (p/t) |
Length of programme | |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/work-psychology/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This MSc programme has a core philosophy of developing students’ knowledge base of theories, principles and practices within work psychology domains. Teaching is designed to develop students’ ability to synthesise and apply this knowledge to complex, multifaceted or ill-defined problems and to develop their ability to communicate with multiple stakeholder groups. Teaching is informed by the forefront of research, theory and practice in work psychology (and where appropriate integrated with other related disciplines). Learning outcomes will underpin subsequent training, career routes / choices and work performance. The programme offers academically rigorous knowledge and skills development that prepares students for Doctoral pathways/research, for the British Psychological Society Stage 2 Qualification in Occupational Psychology (and subsequent registration with the Health and Care Professions Council), and for entry into both specialist work roles and management posts. The programme balances relevant academic theory and research with the advanced application of research methods and applied practices/professional issues in work psychology domains.
The MSc programme in Work Psychology aims:
- To develop an in-depth specialist understanding of theory, research and practice in work psychology
- To encourage critical and reflective analysis of theory, research and practice in work psychology through the consideration of a wide range of work-related issues in diverse work contexts and cultures
- To develop in students the ability to synthesise theory and research and to apply it into practice as practitioners in order to prepare students to offer valuable expertise when dealing with a variety of work-related issues
- To foster a high-level understanding of the scientific, ethical and practical issues associated with the development and application of theory in work psychology through the consideration of multiple stakeholder perspectives
- To prepare students who are intending to pursue a professional qualification in occupational psychology (potentially leading to full membership and Chartered Status with the BPS Division of Occupational Psychology) and/or a PhD, and those wishing to apply their learning in work organisations without following this qualification pathway.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
QAA descriptors for Higher Education Qualification at Level 7 (2008)
-
British Psychological Society Standards for Masters Programmes in Occupational Psychology (2013; and revised draft, 2014)
-
ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ and School of Business and Economics Strategy Documents
-
ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Learning and Teaching Strategy
-
Masters programmes within the School of Business and Economics
-
Health and Care Professions Council Standards of Proficiency – Practitioner Psychologists (2010)
-
European Master on Work and Organizational Psychology WOP-P (content and learning outcomes)
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1 key theories and contemporary practices relating to the assessment of individuals’ knowledge, skills, abilities, goals and other constructs in various work-related contexts and cultures
K2 important and influential research-based theories of career and personal development including the application of a range of psychological theories to individual- and group-level learning, development and knowledge management
K3 the essential features of leadership theories including the implications of these for the identification and development of leaders and the management of a range of work issues
K4 approaches to measuring and managing work performance, employee motivation, and employee participation
K5 the measurement and determinants of work-related attitudes, health and well-being, linked to an understanding of the processes and outcomes of various organisational change interventions
K6 the psychological influences on employees’ responses to different types of work, different work environments, work cultures and different management practices
K7 the development, implementation and evaluation of theory-based problem-solving processes in work-related contexts based on an understanding of key scientist practitioner skills and advanced quantitative and qualitative research methods
K8 professional codes of conduct including BPS Code of Conduct, HCPC Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics, and other relevant ethical principles and guidelines
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1 Critically evaluate knowledge, theory and practice from work psychology and relevant related disciplines
C2 Apply their knowledge and understanding to critically evaluate, synthesise and reflect upon professional and ethical issues raised in both research and practice in work psychology
C3 Apply key theoretical principles to a range of work-related problems and issues in a variety of different work settings
C4 Build strategies for the assessment of work-related issues through psychological enquiry and to critically evaluate the suitability of different strategies for the implementation and evaluation of interventions
C5 Use their understanding of psychological theories and concepts to communicate effectively about all aspects of their work to a range of different stakeholder groups
C6 Integrate, evaluate and apply their knowledge of the topics diversity, fairness, gender and culture across the whole of the curriculum
C7 Reflect upon the development of knowledge and skills relevant to their progression as an occupational psychologist
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1 Identify and apply a variety of assessment methods to gather evidence relating to work-related issues and problems across a range of different domains within work psychology and across all parts of the problem-solving cycle
P2 Make appropriate evidence-based and ethical choices about the suitability of a range of practical theory-based techniques used in work psychology
P3 Use, when appropriate, a range of practical skills commonly deployed by work psychologists (e.g. interviewing techniques, critical incidents, repertory grid, questionnaire design etc.)
P4 Critically and reflectively analyse various sources of evidence and identify both new and established implications for practice
P5 Identify areas of practice and work-related issues that could benefit from research; design, conduct and evaluate an appropriate investigation
P6 Integrate different activities across the problem-solving cycle (e.g. problem assessment, intervention design and evaluation of solutions) in an appropriate and ethical way
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
T1 Communicate effectively orally, electronically and in writing to a wide range of different stakeholder groups and in a number of different formats
T2 Apply constructive and structured approaches to complex problem-solving and intervention evaluation even in the face of uncertainties and incomplete information
T3 Manage personal learning efficiently and effectively through an appreciation of the skills and capabilities needed to apply psychology effectively in work settings
T4 Use IT effectively as a learning and communication tool
T5 Develop and utilise the advanced research skills needed to work with complex data and research / practical agendas
T6 Work effectively and confidently both as an individual and as part of a small team within constrained time-frames
T7 Work independently in a way that stimulates continued professional development by using the available support strategically and effectively
4. Programme structure
The course consists of eight 15-credit modules and one 60-credit research project.
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
Exam Weight |
BSP404 |
Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (S1, S2) |
15 |
0 |
BSP400 |
Leadership and Performance Management (S1) |
15 |
0 |
BSP401 |
Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice (S1) |
15 |
0 |
BSP402 |
Well-being and Work (S1) |
15 |
0 |
BSP403 |
Work Design, Organisational Change and Development (S1) |
15 |
0 |
BSP405 |
Psychological Assessment in Organisations (S2) |
15 |
0 |
BSP406 |
Career Development (S2) |
15 |
0 |
BSP407 |
Learning, Development and Knowledge Management (S2) |
15 |
0 |
BSP408 |
Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology |
60 |
0 |
Students who wish to study part-time will be guided by their personal tutor as to the sequencing and timing of modules, taking into account module pre-requisites and the students’ existing expertise and availability for study. In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. Students may not submit for assessment their Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology until they have completed all other taught modules on the programme. The module Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (BSP404) is a pre-requisite for all modules. For those studying on a part-time basis, at least on of Modules BSP400, BSP401, BSP402 or BSP403 must be studied before BSP405, BSP406 or BSP407.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Business Psychology
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc |
Programme title | Business Psychology |
Programme code | BSPT38 (f/t) BSPT35 (p/t) |
Length of programme | |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This MSc programme has a core philosophy of developing students’ knowledge base of theories, principles and practices within business psychology domains. Teaching is designed to develop students’ ability to synthesise and apply this knowledge to complex, multifaceted or ill-defined problems and to develop their ability to communicate with multiple stakeholder groups. Teaching is informed by the forefront of research, theory and practice in work psychology (and where appropriate integrated with other related disciplines). Learning outcomes will underpin subsequent training, career routes / choices and work performance. The programme offer academically rigorous knowledge and skills development that prepares students for Doctoral pathways/research, and for entry into both specialist work roles and management posts. Graduates of the programme who complete all core modules and the Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology may progress to training for the British Psychological Society Stage 2 Qualification in Occupational Psychology and subsequent registration with the Health and Care Professions Council. However, to follow this pathway a BPS-accredited undergraduate-level conversion course in Psychology will need to be completed either before or after the MSc.
The MSc programme in Business Psychology aims:
- To develop an in-depth specialist understanding of theory, research and practice in business psychology
- To encourage critical and reflective analysis of theory, research and practice in business psychology through the consideration of a wide range of work-related issues in diverse work contexts and cultures
- To develop in students the ability to synthesise theory and research and to apply it into practice as practitioners in order to prepare students to offer valuable expertise when dealing with a variety of work-related issues
- To foster a high-level understanding of the scientific, ethical and practical issues associated with the development and application of theory in business psychology through the consideration of multiple stakeholder perspectives
- To prepare students who may wish to pursue a professional qualification in occupational psychology (potentially leading to full membership and Chartered Status with the BPS Division of Occupational Psychology) and/or a PhD, and those wishing to apply their learning in work organisations without following these qualification pathways.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
QAA descriptors for Higher Education Qualification at Level 7 (2008)
-
British Psychological Society Standards for Masters Programmes in Occupational Psychology (2013; and revised draft, 2014)
-
ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ and School of Business and Economics Strategy Documents
-
ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Learning and Teaching Strategy
-
Masters programmes within the School of Business and Economics
-
Health and Care Professions Council Standards of Proficiency – Practitioner Psychologists (2010)
-
European Master on Work and Organizational Psychology WOP-P (content and learning outcomes)
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
K1 key theories and contemporary practices relating to the assessment of individuals’ knowledge, skills, abilities, goals and other constructs in various work-related contexts and cultures
K2 important and influential research-based theories of career and personal development including the application of a range of psychological theories to individual- and group-level learning, development and knowledge management
K3 the essential features of leadership theories including the implications of these for the identification and development of leaders and the management of a range of work issues
K4 approaches to measuring and managing work performance, employee motivation, and employee participation
K5 the measurement and determinants of work-related attitudes, health and well-being, linked to an understanding of the processes and outcomes of various organisational change interventions
K6 the psychological influences on employees’ responses to different types of work, different work environments, work cultures and different management practices
K7 the development, implementation and evaluation of theory-based problem-solving processes in work-related contexts based on an understanding of key scientist practitioner skills and advanced quantitative and qualitative research methods
K8 professional codes of conduct including BPS Code of Conduct, HCPC Standards of Conduct, Performance and Ethics, and other relevant ethical principles and guidelines
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1 Critically evaluate knowledge, theory and practice from work psychology and relevant related disciplines
C2 Apply their knowledge and understanding to critically evaluate, synthesise and reflect upon professional and ethical issues raised in both research and practice in work psychology
C3 Apply key theoretical principles to a range of work-related problems and issues in a variety of different work settings
C4 Build strategies for the assessment of work-related issues through psychological enquiry and to critically evaluate the suitability of different strategies for the implementation and evaluation of interventions
C5 Use their understanding of psychological theories and concepts to communicate effectively about all aspects of their work to a range of different stakeholder groups
C6 Integrate, evaluate and apply their knowledge of the topics diversity, fairness, gender and culture across the whole of the curriculum
C7 Reflect upon the development of knowledge and skills relevant to their progression as an occupational psychologist
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1 Identify and apply a variety of assessment methods to gather evidence relating to work-related issues and problems across a range of different domains within work psychology and across all parts of the problem-solving cycle
P2 Make appropriate evidence-based and ethical choices about the suitability of a range of practical theory-based techniques used in work psychology
P3 Use, when appropriate, a range of practical skills commonly deployed by work psychologists (e.g. interviewing techniques, critical incidents, repertory grid, questionnaire design etc.)
P4 Critically and reflectively analyse various sources of evidence and identify both new and established implications for practice
P5 Identify areas of practice and work-related issues that could benefit from research; design, conduct and evaluate an appropriate investigation
P6 Integrate different activities across the problem-solving cycle (e.g. problem assessment, intervention design and evaluation of solutions) in an appropriate and ethical way
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
T1 Communicate effectively orally, electronically and in writing to a wide range of different stakeholder groups and in a number of different formats
T2 Apply constructive and structured approaches to complex problem-solving and intervention evaluation even in the face of uncertainties and incomplete information
T3 Manage personal learning efficiently and effectively through an appreciation of the skills and capabilities needed to apply psychology effectively in work settings
T4 Use IT effectively as a learning and communication tool
T5 Develop and utilise the advanced research skills needed to work with complex data and research / practical agendas
T6 Work effectively and confidently both as an individual and as part of a small team within constrained time-frames
T7 Work independently in a way that stimulates continued professional development by using the available support strategically and effectively
4. Programme structure
The course consists of eight 15-credit modules and one 60-credit research project. Students may elect to complete either the Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology (BSP408) OR the Dissertation in Business Psychology (BSP409). Only those completing BSP408 (and all other core modules) can be recorded as having a BPS-accredited MSc.
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
Exam Weight |
BSP404 |
Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (S1, S2) |
15 |
0 |
BSP400 |
Leadership and Performance Management (S1) |
15 |
0 |
BSP401 |
Employee Engagement, Motivation and Voice (S1) |
15 |
0 |
BSP402 |
Well-being and Work (S1) |
15 |
0 |
BSP403 |
Work Design, Organisational Change and Development (S1) |
15 |
0 |
BSP405 |
Psychological Assessment in Organisations (S2) |
15 |
0 |
BSP406 |
Career Development (S2) |
15 |
0 |
BSP407 |
Learning, Development and Knowledge Management (S2) |
15 |
0 |
BSP408 |
Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology (S3: Option) |
60 |
0 |
BSP409 |
Dissertation in Business Psychology (S3: Option) |
60 |
0 |
In exceptional circumstances and with the agreement of the course director, students may select up to two 15-credit modules (one per Semester) from the SBE existing portfolio of taught Masters modules and study these instead of two of the 15-credit modules (one per Semester) from the programme. This will only be permitted if: the substitution allows adequate assessment of learning outcomes across the programme, and the modules timetables do not clash, and the student has the specified pre-requisites. Students will be notified that substituting modules in this way will mean that they will no longer be studying sufficient modules to fulfil the requirements of a BPS Stage 1 Qualification in Occupational Psychology.
Students who wish to study part-time will be guided by their personal tutor as to the sequencing and timing of modules, taking into account module pre-requisites and the students’ existing expertise and availability for study. In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. Students may not submit for assessment their Empirical Research Project in Work Psychology or Dissertation in Business Psychology until they have completed all other taught modules on the programme. The module Gathering and Using Evidence in Work Psychology (BSP404) is a pre-requisite for all modules. For those studying on a part-time basis, at least on of Modules BSP400, BSP401, BSP402 or BSP403 must be studied before BSP405, BSP406 or BSP407.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Business Analytics Consulting
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip |
Programme title | Business Analytics Consulting |
Programme code | BSPT37 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months (i.e. completed programme taught element plus project). For the award of PGDip is nine calendar months (i.e. completed programme taught element). |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/business-analytics-consulting/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
-
To equip students with a broad range of knowledge and analytics methodologies, techniques and tools to enable them to work effectively in supporting problem-solving and decision-making in a business or policy context;
-
To build students’ analytics consulting skills in a number of areas within business and government (e.g. marketing, operations, policy);
-
To enable students to exploit the opportunities offered by the availability of ‘big data’ within and between organisations (e.g. managing big data, leading analytics initiatives);
-
To produce graduates with the ability to use rigorous quantitative and qualitative model-supported analyses to help tackle complex problem or decision situations within organisations;
-
To enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development in preparation for a professional career in analytics within business and government, or as preparation for further research in the field of analytics;
-
To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many analytics experts or users in business and government, and with a taught content and practical experience that enable students to identify opportunities for the deployment of analytics in practice.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
-
The QAA benchmark statement for Master's awards in business and management.
-
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
-
University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
-
Teaching and learning policies of the School of Business and Economics.
-
The increasing take-up of analytics within business and government.
-
The research interests and specialisms of the School of Business and Economics academic staff and their professional involvement in their disciplines.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
K1 The main business or policy application areas in industry, and of current and leading edge research in these areas.
K2 A range of analytics approaches, techniques and tools for analysing big data, together with their expected benefits and limitations.
K3 Current thinking and issues relevant to big data.
K4 The role of the analytics professional and the process of deploying effective analytics projects in organisations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1 Construct original analytics-driven insights that draw on appropriate evidence from a variety of sources.
C2 Critically analyse, evaluate, and synthetize the practice of analytics.
C3 Critically appraise the relative importance and relevance of different sources of data to the deployment of analytics, and recognise and address issues relevant to management of big data.
C4 Recognise opportunities to apply a wide range of analytics approaches in organisations, deployed effectively and critically in either expert or facilitative modes, to a wide range of problem and decision situations.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1 Apply model-supported problem structuring and decision analysis skills to formulate complex or unstructured problem or decision situations, distinguish facts from values, define objectives, preferences, constraints and assumptions, and create and evaluate options.
P2 Make effective use of information and communication technologies, including the appropriate selection and competent application of a range of relevant computer software for deploying analytics.
P3 Conduct research effectively and efficiently into the field of analytics, using a variety of data, information and knowledge sources.
P4 Undertake, and manage effectively, an analytics-driven project in a problem or decision situation within a business or policy context, selecting and employing various methodologies, techniques and tools as appropriate, and developing helpful interactions with analytics users or experts
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
T1 Communicate complex ideas and arguments effectively, both orally and in writing and using a range of media, to expert and lay audiences.
T2 Work effectively with others in a team environment, recognising and utilising individuals’ contributions in group processes, and displaying effective negotiation and project management skills when needed.
T3: Demonstrate high personal effectiveness, including critical self-awareness, self-reflection and self-management, sensitivity to diversity in people and situations, time management, and the ability to take responsibility for their own learning, and to continue learning through reflection on practice and experience.
T4: Use information technology to scan, organise and assess relevant information for problem solving, decision making and sharing knowledge.
T5: Analyse complex problems and develop novel solutions, and apply numerical reasoning appropriately in problem solving processes.
Learning outcomes associated with the PGDip do not include K4, C4, P4 and T5.,
4. Programme structure
The MSc programme lasts one-year full-time, and is divided into a taught and project component. Students take 8 compulsory taught modules delivered across two semesters, which amount to 120 credits. In the summer students take a supervised analytics consulting or research project worth 60 credits.
Code |
Tittle |
Modular weight |
Semester |
BSP410 |
Consulting for Analytics |
15 |
1 |
BSP411 |
Discovery Analytics |
15 |
1 |
BSP412 |
Decision Analytics |
15 |
1 |
BSP413 |
Managing Big Data |
15 |
1 |
BSP414 |
Customer Analytics |
15 |
2 |
BSP415 |
Operations Analytics |
15 |
2 |
BSP416 |
Policy and Strategy Analytics |
15 |
2 |
BSP417 |
Leading Analytics Initiatives |
15 |
2 |
BSP418 |
Analytics Project |
60 |
3 |
The PGDip is awarded after successful completion of all eight 15-credit taught modules.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. In addition, and in accordance with Regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MBA/ MBA with Internship (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Association of MBAs (AMBA) |
Final award | MBA/PGDip/PGCert |
Programme title | Business Administration/Business Administration with Internship |
Programme code | BSPT20, BSPT22,BSPT24 |
Length of programme | The ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ MBA programme is offered on a full-time and a part-time basis. The programme commences in October of each academic year. The period of study for the award of MBA is twelve calendar months when studied as a full-time programme and twenty-four to thirty-six calendar months when studied as a part-time programme. The period of study for the MBA with Internship is 24 calendar months inclusive of the Internship. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | MBA Full-time: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/businesseconomics/masterofbusinessadministrationmba/ MBA Part-time: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/businesseconomics/ masterofbusinessadministrationpart-time/
With the permission of the MBA Director, 40 credits may be obtained towards the award of MBA on the basis of successful completion of all modules of the following qualifications. When credit is awarded to candidates under this provision, it will normally replace that awarded for modules that most closely correspond with the prior study, as defined by the MBA Director.
- Professional Diploma in Management - Postgraduate Diploma in Management - Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership - Postgraduate Diploma in Industrial Sales and Marketing - MSc in Management (Professional) - MSc in Management and Leadership - MSc in Management or International Management or Marketing and Management or Finance and Management or Business Analysis and Management
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- Attract sufficient richly experienced managers from a wide range of educational, business and commercial backgrounds to create a positive learning environment for all participants.
- Provide such managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of general intellectual and personal development, within the context of the academic study of business and management.
- Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities internationally, and to permit detailed study of chosen specialisations.
- Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing employment within the business, commercial and public sectors, and through an emphasis in all subjects onmanagerial relevance.
- Develop highly trained and adaptable managers who are able to meet the management and professional needs of organisations that are facing the challenges of the future.
- Develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- Encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas
- Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines
- Association of MBAs (AMBA) accreditation guidelines
- School of Business and Economics ('The School') Mission Statement of General Aims for Postgraduate Programmes
- The University Academic Quality Procedures
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
- the contexts and processes in which enterprsie and innovation are able to thrive and prosper - including managerial style, organisational culture and stakeholder expectations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business contextincluding word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
- effectively engage with organisations adopting new approaches to managing enterprise and produce a group consultancy repoort on an orgnaisational strategic initiative.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- use effective team-working skills including leadership, team building and project management;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Content
Code |
Module title |
Modular weight |
Semester |
Core/Option |
BSP300 |
Business Analytics |
10 |
1 |
C |
BSP302 |
Accounting and Performance Manangement |
10 |
1 |
C |
BSP303 |
Management of Human Resources |
10 |
1 |
C |
BSP304 |
Business Economics |
10 |
1 |
C |
BSP317 |
Leading Strategic Change |
20 |
1 |
C |
BSP319 |
Business Administration Project |
30 |
1 |
C |
|
|
|
|
|
BSP301 |
Marketing |
10 |
2 |
C |
BSP308 |
Corporate Finance |
10 |
2 |
C |
BSP313 |
Problem Solving for Leaders |
10 |
2 |
C |
BSP321 |
Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership |
10 |
2 |
C |
BSP109 |
International Management |
10 |
2 |
O |
BSP111 |
Career Management |
10 |
2 |
O |
BSP112 |
Information Systems Management & Strategy |
10 |
2 |
O |
BSP220 |
Media Management |
10 |
2 |
O |
|
|
|
|
|
BSP314 |
Managing Innovation |
20 |
3 |
C |
BSI335 |
MBA Internship |
0 |
3 |
C |
BSP110 |
Project Management |
10 |
3 |
O |
BSP115 |
ESSAM |
20 |
3 |
O |
BSP305 |
Operations Management |
10 |
3 |
O |
MBA Optional Modules
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA Programme will undertake optional modules (listed in this programme specification) with a total module weight of 30 credits. Option choices may be subject to change and/or timetabling constraints.
MBA with Internship
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA with Internship will undertake the MBA Internship module BSI335. The professional placement will start either at the end of semester 2 or at the end of semester 3.
4.2 The School reserves the right to offer or to withdraw any module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Assessment
5.1.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
- To be eligible for the award of MBA candidates must have achieved credit in BSP319.
- To be eligilble for the award of MBA with Professional Placement candidates must additionally have successfully completed BSI335, the MBA Professional Placement module. Candidates who have not successfully completed BSI335 the MBA Professional Placement module but who otherwise satisfy the requirements of the MBA regulations will be eligible for the award of MBA.
5.1.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, but with the exclusion of module BSP319 Project, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
n/a
Programme Specification
BS MBA/ MBA with Internship (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Association of MBAs (AMBA) |
Final award | MBA/PGDip/PGCert |
Programme title | Business Administration/Business Administration with Internship |
Programme code | BSPT20, BSPT22,BSPT24 |
Length of programme | The ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ MBA programme is offered on a full-time and a part-time basis. The programme commences in October of each academic year. The period of study for the award of MBA is twelve calendar months when studied as a full-time programme and twenty-four to thirty-six calendar months when studied as a part-time programme. The period of study for the MBA with Internship is 24 calendar months inclusive of the Internship. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | MBA Full-time: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/businesseconomics/masterofbusinessadministrationmba/ MBA Part-time: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/businesseconomics/ masterofbusinessadministrationpart-time/
With the permission of the MBA Director, 40 credits may be obtained towards the award of MBA on the basis of successful completion of all modules of the following qualifications. When credit is awarded to candidates under this provision, it will normally replace that awarded for modules that most closely correspond with the prior study, as defined by the MBA Director.
- Professional Diploma in Management - Postgraduate Diploma in Management - Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership - Postgraduate Diploma in Industrial Sales and Marketing - MSc in Management (Professional) - MSc in Management and Leadership - MSc in Management or International Management or Marketing and Management or Finance and Management or Business Analysis and Management
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- Attract sufficient richly experienced managers from a wide range of educational, business and commercial backgrounds to create a positive learning environment for all participants.
- Provide such managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of general intellectual and personal development, within the context of the academic study of business and management.
- Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities internationally, and to permit detailed study of chosen specialisations.
- Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing employment within the business, commercial and public sectors, and through an emphasis in all subjects onmanagerial relevance.
- Develop highly trained and adaptable managers who are able to meet the management and professional needs of organisations that are facing the challenges of the future.
- Develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- Encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas
- Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines
- Association of MBAs (AMBA) accreditation guidelines
- School of Business and Economics ('The School') Mission Statement of General Aims for Postgraduate Programmes
- The University Academic Quality Procedures
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
- the contexts and processes in which enterprsie and innovation are able to thrive and prosper - including managerial style, organisational culture and stakeholder expectations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business contextincluding word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
- effectively engage with organisations adopting new approaches to managing enterprise and produce a group consultancy repoort on an orgnaisational strategic initiative.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- use effective team-working skills including leadership, team building and project management;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Content
Code |
Module title |
Modular weight |
Semester |
Core/Option FT pathway |
Core/Option PT pathway |
BSP301 |
Marketing |
10 |
1 |
C |
C |
BSP302 |
Accounting and Performance Manangement |
10 |
1 |
C |
C |
BSP313 |
Problem Solving for Leaders |
10 |
1 |
C |
C |
BSP304 |
Business Economics |
10 |
1 |
C |
C |
BSP317 |
Leading Strategic Change |
20 |
1 |
C |
O |
BSP319 |
Business Administration Project |
30 |
1- 3 |
C |
C |
BSP322 |
Work Based Learning Project and Research Methods |
30 |
1-3 |
C |
N/A |
BSP306 |
Global Outsourcing and Offshoring of Services |
10 |
1 |
O |
O |
BSP300 |
Business Analytics |
10 |
2 |
C |
C |
BSP308 |
Corporate Finance |
10 |
2 |
C |
O |
BSP303 |
Management of Human Resources |
10 |
2 |
C |
C |
BSP321 |
Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership |
10 |
2 |
C |
C |
BSP109 |
International Management |
10 |
2 |
O |
O |
BSP112 |
Information Systems Management & Strategy |
10 |
2 |
O |
O |
BSP220 |
Media Management |
10 |
2 |
O |
O |
BSP314 |
Managing Innovation |
20 |
3 |
C |
C |
BSI335 |
MBA Internship |
0 |
3 |
C |
N/A |
BSP310 |
Project Management |
10 |
3 |
O |
O |
BSP305 |
Operations Management |
10 |
3 |
O |
O |
BSP115 |
ESSAM |
20 |
3 |
O |
O |
BSI335 |
MBA Internship |
0 |
3 |
O |
N/A |
MBA Optional Modules
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA Programme (full-time pathway) will undertake optional modules with a total module weight of 30 credits. Students on the part-time pathway will undertake optional modules with a total module weight of 60 credits. Option choices may be subject to change and/or timetabling constraints.
MBA with Internship
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA with Internship will undertake the MBA Internship module BSI335. The professional placement will start either at the end of semester 2 or at the end of semester 3.
4.2 The School reserves the right to offer or to withdraw any module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Assessment
5.1.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
- To be eligible for the award of MBA candidates must have achieved credit in BSP319 or BSP322.
- To be eligilble for the award of MBA with Internship candidates must additionally have successfully completed BSI335, the MBA Internship module. Candidates who have not successfully completed BSI335 the MBA Professional Placement module but who otherwise satisfy the requirements of the MBA regulations will be eligible for the award of MBA.
5.1.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, but with the exclusion of module BSP319 or BSP322, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
n/a
Programme Specification
BS MBA/ MBA International Sports Management/ MBA with Internship(2012-2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Association of MBAs (AMBA) |
Final award | MBA/PGDip/PGCert |
Programme title | Business Administration/ Business Administration (International Sports Management)/ Business Administration with Internship |
Programme code | BSPT20, BSPT22, BSPT23, BSPT24 |
Length of programme | The ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ MBA programme is offered on a full-time and a part-time basis. The ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ MBA (International Sports Management) is only offered on a part-time basis. The full-time programme commences in October of each academic year and the part-time programme in both October and February. The International Sports Management MBA commences in October of each academic year. The period of study for the award of MBA is twelve calendar months when studied as a full-time programme and twenty-four to thirty-six calendar months when studied as a part-time programme. The period of study for the MBA with Internship is 24 calendar months inclusive of the Internship. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | MBA Full-time: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/businesseconomics/masterofbusinessadministrationmba/ MBA Part-time: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/businesseconomics/ masterofbusinessadministrationpart-time/ MBA International Sports: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalsportsmanagementmba/
With the permission of the MBA Director, 40 credits may be obtained towards the award of MBA on the basis of successful completion of all modules of the following qualifications. When credit is awarded to candidates under this provision, it will normally replace that awarded for modules that most closely correspond with the prior study, as defined by the MBA Director.
- Professional Diploma in Management - Postgraduate Diploma in Management - Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership - Postgraduate Diploma in Industrial Sales and Marketing - MSc in Management (Professional) - MSc in Management and Leadership - MSc in Management or International Management or Marketing and Management or Finance and Management or Business Analysis and Management
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- Attract sufficient richly experienced managers from a wide range of educational, business and commercial backgrounds to create a positive learning environment for all participants.
- Provide such managers with a challenging educational experience in terms of general intellectual and personal development, within the context of the academic study of business and management.
- Enable participants to develop a thorough conceptual understanding of the core management disciplines and activities internationally, and to permit detailed study of chosen specialisations.
- Enhance the management skills of participants through their ongoing employment within the business, commercial and public sectors, and through an emphasis in all subjects onmanagerial relevance.
- Develop highly trained and adaptable managers who are able to meet the management and professional needs of organisations that are facing the challenges of the future.
- Develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- Encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas
- Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Association of Business School (ABS) guidelines
- Association of MBAs (AMBA) accreditation guidelines
- School of Business and Economics ('The School') Mission Statement of General Aims for Postgraduate Programmes
- The University Academic Quality Procedures
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- A1 - the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- A2 - the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- A3 - how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
- A4 - the contexts and processes in which enterprsie and innovation are able to thrive and prosper - including managerial style, organisational culture and stakeholder expectations.
For the MBA (International Sports Management):
- A5 - the International Sports Management environment, including regulation, governance and legal frameworks.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business contextincluding word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
For the full-time MBA:
- effectively engage with organisations adopting new approaches to managing enterprise and produce a group consultancy repoort on an orgnaisational strategic initiative.
For the MBA (International Sports Management):
- effectively engage with organisations int he sports management sector to produce a group consultancy report on an organisational strategic initiative.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- use effective team-working skills including leadership, team building and project management;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Content
Code |
Module title |
Modular weight |
Semester |
Full-time MBA |
Part-time MBA |
MBA (International Sports Management)
|
BSP300 |
Business Analytics |
10 |
1 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP301 |
Marketing |
10 |
2 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP302 |
Accounting and Performance Manangement |
10 |
1 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP303 |
Management of Human Resources |
10 |
1 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP304 |
Business Economics |
10 |
1 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP308 |
Corporate Finance |
10 |
2 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP313 |
Problem Solving for Leaders |
10 |
2 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP314 |
Managing Innovation |
20 |
2 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP317 |
Leading Strategic Change |
20 |
1 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP319 |
Business Administration Project and Research Methods |
30 |
3 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP321 |
Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership |
10 |
2 |
c |
N/A |
N/A |
BSP115 |
Advanced Management |
20 |
3 |
c |
option |
N/A |
BSP100 |
Business Analytics |
10 |
1 |
N/A |
c |
N/A |
BSP101 |
Marketing |
10 |
1 |
N/A |
c |
N/A |
BSP102 |
Accounting for Managers |
10 |
2 |
N/A |
c |
N/A |
BSP103 |
Management of Human Resources |
10 |
2 |
N/A |
c |
N/A |
BSP104 |
Business Economics |
10 |
1 |
N/A |
c |
N/A |
BSP105 |
Operations Management |
10 |
2 |
N/A |
c |
N/A |
BSP113 |
Problem Solving for Leaders |
10 |
2 |
N/A |
c |
o |
BSP114 |
Managing Innovation |
20 |
2 |
N/A |
c |
N/A |
BSP119 |
Business Administration Project and Research Methods |
30 |
3 |
N/A |
c |
N/A |
BSP121 |
Contemporary Perspectives on Leadership |
10 |
3 |
N/A |
c |
o |
BSP200 |
Business Analytics |
10 |
Y1,S2 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP201 |
Marketing |
10 |
Y1,S2 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP202 |
Accounting for Managers |
10 |
Y1,S1 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP203 |
Human Resource Management in Sports Organisations |
10 |
Y1,S2 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP204 |
Sports Management Environment |
10 |
Y1,S1 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP205 |
Operations Management |
10 |
Y1,S1 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP210 |
Project Management |
10 |
Y2,S1 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP220 |
Media Management |
10 |
Y2,S2 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP214 |
Managing Sports Technology and Innovation |
20 |
Y2,S2 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP217 |
Leading Strategic Change |
20 |
Y2,S1 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP215 |
International Sports Management |
30 |
Y2,S3 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
BSP225 |
Sports Management Project |
30 |
Y2,S3 |
N/A |
N/A |
c |
MBA Optional Modules
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the part-time MBA Programme will undertake optional modules from the current School catalogue of available MBA options with a total module weight of 60 credits. Students on the full-time/full-time with internship MBA programme will undertake optional modules from the current school catalogue of available MBA options with a module module weight of 30 credits.
MBA Module Selection
Students registered on the part-time or International Sports Management MBA may select modules from any programme within the MBA suite. However students must complete the core modules of their programme, therefore where appropriate, choices must be equivalent to the core modules of their registered programme.
MBA with Internship
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students on the MBA with Internship will undertake the MBA Professional Placement module BSI335. The professional placement will start either at the end of semester 2 or at the end of semester 3.
4.2 The School reserves the right to offer or to withdraw any module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Assessment
5.1.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
- To be eligible for the award of MBA candidates must have achieved credit in BSP119, BSP319 or BSP225.
- To be eligilble for the award of MBA with Professional Placement candidates must additionally have successfully completed BSI335, the MBA Professional Placement module. Candidates who have not successfully completed BSI335 the MBA Professional Placement module but who otherwise satisfy the requirements of the MBA regulations will be eligible for the award of MBA.
5.1.2 In accordance with Regulation XXI, but with the exclusion of modules BSP119, BSP319 and BSP225 Project, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University's special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
n/a
Programme Specification
BS MSc Economics & Finance/Financial Economics
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Economics and Finance |
Programme code | Degree Paths: Economics and Finance(ECTP31) Financial Economics (ECPT37) |
Length of programme | The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of MSc. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicsandfinance/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide basic training for doctoral level research, including a sound foundation in research methods and economic theory, with a choice of fields of specialisation in economics and finance.
- To allow students to be awarded MSc in Economics and Finance or MSc Financial Economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools allowing them to understand and analyse contemporary issues in economic policy.
- To develop in students a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England, Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of advances in core microeconomic and macroeconomic theory
- Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of either the operations of financial markets, institutions and systems around the World or core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment
- Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques necessary to allow for formal analysis of the above mentioned material
- Undertake independent research in economics and finance, using appropriate research tools and quantitative methods.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse theoretical and practical problems in economics and finance by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines
- Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in economics and finance
- Use the professional and academic literature in economics and finance to formulate questions suitable for empirical research
- Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in economics and finance.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Present word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in economics and finance
- Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out statistical hypothesis testing.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Apply skills in analysis (including statistical analysis) and problem formulation to areas of general debate other than economics and finance
- Use skills in synthesis to formulate key issues in areas of general debate other than economics and finance.
- Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines.
More generally, students should have further developed skills in:
- Numeracy;
- Logical thinking and problem solving
- Use of information technology (retrieval of data, data analysis using statistical packages and computer files, web-based information searching, basic word-processing and spreadsheet methods)
- Written communication
- Time management and decision-making
- Independent study
- Group study.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Semester 1 (Total Modular Weight 60)
a) Compulsory Modules
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP204 |
Economics of Firms and Markets |
15 |
ECP205 |
Macroeconomic Policy and Financial Markets |
15 |
ECP206 |
Economic Data Analysis |
15 |
ECP104 |
Research Communication (continued in Semester 2) |
|
b) Optional Module
One module with a total modular weight of 15 to be chosen from the list below.
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP201 |
The Financial System |
15 |
ECP202 |
Financial Economics |
15 |
MAP104 |
Introduction to Measure Theory and Martingales (subject to permission by Programme Director) |
15 |
MAP114 |
Stochastic Models in Finance (subject to permission by Programme Director) |
15 |
4.2 Semester 2 (Total Modular Weight 75)
a) Compulsory Modules
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP256 |
Applied Financial Econometrics |
15 |
ECP104 |
Research Communication (continued from Semester 1) |
15 |
b) Optional Modules
Three modules with a total modular weight of 45 to be chosen from the list below.
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP150 |
International Money and Finance |
15 |
ECP158 |
Applied Banking and Financial Modelling |
15 |
ECP251 |
Risk Management and Derivatives |
15 |
ECP254 |
Banking and Financial Markets |
15 |
ECP255 |
Corporate Finance |
15 |
MAP204 |
Stochastic Calculus and Theory of Stochastic Pricing (Pre-Req MAP104) |
15 |
4.3 Assessed Research (Total Modular Weight 45)
During the summer period candidates will be required to submit a dissertation.
Dissertation
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP305 |
Dissertation |
45 |
-
The subject of the dissertation will be a topic in economics or finance, and will be supervised by a full-time member of staff in the School of Business and Economics.
All work for the dissertation must be undertaken on a full-time basis at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ, except in very special circumstances and with the prior agreement of the dissertation supervisor and module organiser.
-
Two copies of the dissertation, in approved form, should be submitted.
-
A candidate whose Dissertation is failed with a mark of 40-49% will be permitted to submit a revised version on one occasion only. A candidate whose Dissertation is failed with a mark of less than 40% will be permitted to submit a Dissertation on a new topic on one occasion only. In either case the date for re-submission will be set by the Review Board.
Dissertation Registration Criteria
-
The student must submit a research proposal by 5:00 pm on the first Friday of the summer term. This proposed topic must be accepted by a dissertation supervisor and the module organiser, according to conditions set out in the module specifications for ECP305 (Dissertation). A student who does not submit an acceptable proposal will be allocated a dissertation topic, chosen by the module organiser.
-
No more than three students will normally be allocated to any one supervisor.
-
A dissertation that is not written on the accepted topic cannot be submitted without the prior approval of both the module organiser and the dissertation supervisor.
General Provisions
The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to offer or withdraw any taught module.
The School of Business and Economics may exercise its discretion in waiving prerequisites for its modules under exceptional circumstances.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. However for the Postgraduate Diploma: candidates must accumulate 105 credits plus marks of 40-49% in modules worth a total of at least 15 credits.
5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a taught module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.
5.3 All examinations and tests must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.
5.4 The MSc/PGDip in Economics and Finance will normally be awarded following successful completion of programme requirements. However students who have successfully completed named modules may qualify for MSc awards as specified in 5.5 below.
5.5 The MSc in Financial Economics may be awarded following successful completion of programme requirements to include the modules Financial Economics (ECP202) and at least one of Asset Management and Derivatives (ECP251) or Corporate Finance (ECP255) and a dissertation (ECP305 in an acceptable field of financial economics.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Applied Finance and Banking
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGCert / PGDip |
Programme title | Applied Finance and Banking |
Programme code | ECPT42 |
Length of programme | The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of MSc. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingandfinance/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To develop knowledge of theories and their application in banking, and financial markets
- To give students general training that is vocationally relevant to employment in the financial services sectors of government, commerce and industry
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis that will allow them to undertake applied research for their employers in the areas of banking and financial markets.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The academic level at which the Master of Science (MSc) programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Understand and explain the functions and operations of institutions, financial markets and systems, with special reference to central banks, commercial banks and other financial intermediaries
- Understand and explain the core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment, and to be able to use these theories to assist them in asset management
- Understand the inter-relationships between banking, the financial system and the investment decisions of individual and institutional investors
- Undertake applied research in banking and financial markets, using research tools and quantitative methods appropriate to the conduct of such research.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse theoretical and practical problems in banking and financial markets, by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines;
- Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in banking and financial markets;
- Use the professional and academic literature in banking and financial markets, to formulate questions suitable for empirical research;
- Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in banking and financial markets.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Present word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in banking and financial markets
- Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out statistical hypothesis testing.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Apply skills in analysis and problem formulation to areas of general debate in disciplines other than those the of the named award
- Use skills in synthesis to formulate key issues in areas of general debate in disciplines other than those the of the named award
- Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines
More generally, students should have further developed skills in:
- Numeracy
- Logical thinking and problem solving
- Use of information technology (retrieval of data, web-based information searching, handling of data, word-processing and spreadsheet methods)
- Written and oral communication
- Time management and decision-making
- Independent study
- Group study.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Semester 1 (Total Modular Weight 60)
Compulsory Modules
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP100 |
Economics of Banking and Financial Markets |
15 |
ECP102 |
Essentials of Financial Economics |
15 |
ECP201 |
The Financial System |
15 |
ECP101 |
Methods of Data Analysis |
15 |
ECP104 |
Research Communication (continued in Semester 2) |
|
4.2 Semester 2 (Total Modular Weight 75)
a) Compulsory Modules
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP104 |
Research Communication (continued from Semester 1) |
15 |
ECP151 |
introduction to Derivatives and Market Risk |
15 |
ECP155 |
Credit Risk Management |
15 |
b) Optional Modules
Two modules each with a weight of 15, must be chosen from the MSc Module List (semester 2) to be published by the School before the end of semester 1.
4.3 Assessed Research Practice (Total Modular Weight 45)
During the summer period the student will be required to undertake supervised research practice, to be assessed by examination in two modules, following the completion of the research communication module.
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP104 |
Research Communication (Examined in Semester 2) |
|
ECP303 |
Assessed Research Practice I |
15 |
ECP304 |
Assessed Research Practice II |
30 |
a) Research seminars will be provided in research subjects to be published by the School before the end of the third week of semester two.
b) Students must attend research seminars in one subject area and contribute to them by carrying out and reporting on research work, in ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ, under the guidance of the seminar convenor.
c) Attainment in the chosen seminar subject will be assessed in two modules, ECP303 and ECP304, each covering a different aspect of the chosen subject. ECP303 will examine specialist subject knowledge and ECP304 will examine research skills.
d) Students will be allocated by the module organiser to a research subject relevant to financial economics, banking, finance or financial markets.
e) A candidate who fails an examination will be permitted to undertake re-assessment on one occasion only. The candidate may choose to be re-assessed either at a special re-assessment exam to be in October or at the normal next assessment of these modules during the next academic year.
f) Re-assessment with tuition is permitted during the next normal tuition period but tuition may not be available in the same research topic that was initially assessed.
g) The School reserves the right not to offer assessed research practice in every subject area covered by taught modules.
General Provisions
The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional taught module.
The School of Business and Economics may exercise its discretion in waiving prerequisites for its modules under exceptional circumstances.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. However for the Postgraduate Diploma: candidates must accumulate 105 credits plus marks of 40-49% in modules worth a total of at least 15 credits.
5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.
5.3 All examinations and tests must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Banking and Finance
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PG Dip/ PG Cert |
Programme title | Banking and Finance |
Programme code | ECPT36 |
Length of programme | The Programme is offered on a full-time basis only (except for purposes of re-assessment and in cases of credit transfer), commencing at the beginning of each academic session. The minimum period of registration is 9 calendar months for the award of PGDip and 12 calendar months for the award of the MSc. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingandfinance/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To develop knowledge of theories of banking, finance and research methods, and the application of these theories, beyond bachelor degree level, to provide basic training for doctoral level research
- To give students general training that is vocationally relevant to employment in the financial services sectors of government, commerce and industry
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis that will allow them to undertake applied research for their employers in the areas of banking and finance
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The academic level at which the MSc programme is taught and assessed is guided by the criteria for the degree of Master in The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications in England Wales and Northern Ireland, published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Understand and explain the functions and operations of institutions, financial markets and systems, with special reference to central banks, commercial banks and other financial intermediaries
- Understand and explain the core theories of financial economics with respect to risk management, asset pricing and investment, and to be able to use these theories to assist them in asset management
- Undertake independent applied research in banking and finance, using basic research tools and quantitative methods appropriate to the conduct of independent research.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse theoretical and practical problems in banking and finance by using the theories and quantitative methods appropriate to those disciplines
- Synthesise important issues and themes from the professional and academic literature in banking and finance
- Use the professional and academic literature in banking and finance to formulate questions suitable for empirical research
- Critically analyse professional and academic research papers in banking and finance.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Present word-processed written reports using structure, paragraphing and citation, appropriate to professional and academic standards in banking and finance
- Construct tables of statistical data, interpret such data, and carry out basic forms of statistical hypothesis testing.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Apply skills in analysis (including statistical analysis) and problem formulation to areas of general debate other than banking and finance
- Use skills in synthesis to formulate key issues in areas of general debate other than banking and finance.
- Enhance skills in oral presentation of reports on group work, subject to deadlines.
More generally, students should have further developed skills in:
- Numeracy
- Logical thinking and problem solving
- Use of information technology (retrieval of data, web-based information searching, handling of data in computer files, basic word-processing and spreadsheet methods)
- Written communication
- Time management and decision-making
- Independent study
- Group study.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Semester 1 (Total Modular Weight 60)
a) Compulsory Modules
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP201 |
The Financial System |
15 |
ECP202 |
Financial Economics |
15 |
ECP104 |
Research Communication (continued in Semester 2) |
|
ECP206 |
Economic Data Analysis |
15 |
b) Optional Module
One module with a total modular weight of 15 to be chosen from the list below.
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP204 |
Economics of Firms and Markets (subject to permission by Programme Director) |
15 |
ECP205 |
Macroeconomic Policy and Financial Markets |
15 |
MAP104 |
Introduction to Measure Theory and Martingales (subject to permission by Programme Director) |
15 |
MAP114 |
Stochastic Models in Finance (subject to permission by Programme Director) |
15 |
4.2 Semester 2 (Total Modular Weight 75)
a) Compulsory Modules
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP254 |
Banking and Financial Markets |
15 |
ECP104 |
Research Communication (continued from Sem 1) |
15 |
ECP256 |
Applied Financial Econometrics |
15 |
At least one of: |
|
|
ECP251 |
Risk Management and Derivatives |
15 |
ECP255 |
Corporate Finance |
15 |
b) Optional Module
One module with a total modular weight of 15 to be chosen from the list below.
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP150 |
International Money and Finance |
15 |
ECP158 |
Applied Banking and Financial Modelling |
15 |
MAP204 |
Stochastic Calculus and Theory of Stochastic Pricing (Pre-Req MAP104) |
15 |
4.3 Assessed Research (Total Modular Weight 45)
During the summer period candidates will be required either to submit a dissertation or to attend one research practice seminar followed by examination.
a) Dissertation
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP305 |
Dissertation |
45 |
-
The subject of the dissertation will be a topic in banking or finance and will be supervised by a full-time member of staff of the School of Business and Economics.
-
Two copies of the dissertation, in approved form, should be submitted.
-
A candidate whose Dissertation is failed with a mark of 40-49% will be permitted to submit a revised version on one occasion only. A candidate whose Dissertation is failed with a mark of less than 40% will be permitted to submit a Dissertation on a new topic on one occasion only. In either case the date for re-submission will be set by the Review Board.
b) Research Practice Seminar
CODE |
TITLE |
MODULAR WEIGHT |
ECP301 |
Specialist Subject Knowledge |
15 |
ECP302 |
Research Skills |
30 |
-
Research practice seminars will be provided in seminar subject groups, on subjects to be published by the School before the end of semester one.
-
Students must attend and contribute to one research practice seminar group on a subject specifically related to banking, economics or finance. The seminar subject will be assessed by examination in the modules ECP301 and ECP302, worth 15 and 30 credits respectively.
-
Students will be allocated to a seminar group at the sole discretion of the organiser for modules ECP301 and ECP302.
-
Re-assessment with tuition is permitted during the next normal tuition period, if required, but tuition may not be available in the same research topic that was initially assessed.
-
The School reserves the right not to offer a research seminar in every subject area covered by taught modules and to offer a research practice seminar in subject areas not covered by taught modules.
All work for the dissertation and research practice seminar modules must be undertaken on a full-time basis at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ, except in very special circumstances and with the prior agreement of the dissertation supervisor and module organiser.
Dissertation Registration Criteria
-
All students will be registered initially as candidates for the research practice seminar modules ECP301 and ECP302.
-
To be eligible to register for the dissertation a student must have obtained credit in nine taught modules including ECP104, normally with an overall average mark of not less than 60% and subject to the approval of the MSc Dissertation Co-ordinator.
-
Students who have not indicated their preference for the dissertation on the Semester 2 Options Form will not be eligible to select the dissertation at a later date.
-
To be eligible to register for the dissertation a student must submit a research proposal by 5:00 pm on the first Friday of the summer term. This proposed topic must be accepted by a dissertation supervisor and the module organiser, according to conditions set out in the module specifications for ECP305 (Dissertation). A student who does not submit an acceptable proposal will be allocated a dissertation topic chosen by the module organiser.
-
No more than three students will normally be allocated to any one supervisor.
-
A dissertation that is not written on the accepted topic cannot be submitted without the prior approval of both the module organiser and the dissertation supervisor.
General Provisions
The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to offer or withdraw any taught module.
The School of Business and Economics may exercise its discretion in waiving prerequisites for its modules under exceptional circumstances.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI. However for the Postgraduate Diploma: candidates must accumulate 105 credits plus marks of 40-49% in modules worth a total of at least 15 credits
5.2 Candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a taught module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s Special Assessment Period.
5.3 All examinations and tests must be taken at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ unless special permission is obtained in advance from the Programme Director.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Business Analysis and Management 2015 entry
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc /PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Business Analysis and Management 2015 entry |
Programme code | BSPT09 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/businessanalysisandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business and management;
- develop modelling, analysis and consultancy skills and expertise with a strong emphasis on quantitative and IT intensive techniques for handling complex business decision problems
- attract well-qualified students with non-business/management first degrees from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds to facilitate a multi-perspective interactive learning process;
- add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles within them;
- produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
- prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations and, in particular, careers as business analysts or business consultants, by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
- develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community;
- enhance the employability of our graduates in regard to either their first degree discipline or in a management role;
- encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
- enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context:
- the numerical, analytical and computer based tools, techniques and approaches that are required for the thorough analysis and solution of complex decision problems in a business context, together with the advantages and disadvantages and necessary precautions in using them.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- interpret extensive and complex numerical information to assess and evaluate alternative course of action in business decision making;
- formulate management decision problems in terms of appropriate models, identifying objectives, constraints and alternative options, and assess the validity of such formulations;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- select and apply a range of sophisticated numerical and computer based techniques for analysing and resolving complex decision making problems in business situations;
- interact effectively with other management professionals in assisting them to resolve planning problems;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- apply sophisticated numerical reasoning in solving problems;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- evaluate the merits of different software packages and acquire skills in new software packages quickly;
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP020 |
Human Resource Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP021 |
Accounting and Financial Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP022 |
Marketing Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP023 |
Operations Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP026 |
Information Systems and Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP035 |
Operational Research Methods |
15 |
2 |
BSP043 |
Business Forecasting |
15 |
2 |
BSP039 |
Business Analysis & Planning |
30 |
3 |
BSP028 |
Strategic Management |
15 |
3 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTION MODULES
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose TWO modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.
BUSINESS ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT |
|||
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP024 |
Business Economics |
15 |
2 |
BSP033 |
International Business Environment |
15 |
2 |
BSP034 |
Enterprise, Employability & Personal Development |
15 |
2 |
BSP038 |
Global Outsourcing & Offshoring of Services |
15 |
2 |
BSP040 |
International Marketing |
15 |
2 |
BSP041 |
Small Business & Entrepreneurship |
15 |
2 |
BSP044 |
Services & Retail Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP045 |
Work Psychology |
15 |
2 |
BSP046 |
Enterprise Resource Planning |
15 |
2 |
BSP047 |
Logistics & Supply Chain Management |
15 |
2 |
*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).
4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.
4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components. However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.
4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
5.3 In addition students may choose to be reassessed in BSP028 Strategic Management and BSP039 Business Analysis and Planning in January of the next academic year.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Management 2015 entry
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert |
Programme title | Management 2015 entry |
Programme code | BSPT10 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/management/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business and management;
- attract well-qualified students with non-business/management first degrees from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds to facilitate a multi-perspective interactive learning process;
- add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles within them;
- produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
- prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
- develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community;
- enhance the employability of our graduates in regard to either their first degree discipline or in a management role;
- encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
- enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 135)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP020 |
Human Resource Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP021 |
Accounting and Financial Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP022 |
Marketing Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP023 |
Operations Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP025 |
Business Analysis |
15 |
2 |
BSP026 |
Information Systems and Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP027 |
Management Analysis |
30 |
3 |
BSP028 |
Strategic Management |
15 |
3 |
Semester Two Option Modules
In addition to the listed compulsory Modules, students will choose THREE Modules (total Module weight 45) to be chosen from the list below.
MANAGEMENT |
|||
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP024 |
Business Economics |
15 |
2 |
BSP032 |
International & Cross Cultural Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP034 |
Enterprise, Employability & Personal Development |
15 |
2 |
BSP038 |
Global Outsourcing & Offshoring of Services |
15 |
2 |
BSP040 |
International Marketing |
15 |
2 |
BSP041 |
Small Business & Entrepreneurship |
15 |
2 |
BSP043 |
Business Forecasting |
15 |
2 |
BSP044 |
Services & Retail Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP045 |
Work Psychology |
15 |
2 |
BSP046 |
Enterprise Resource Planning |
15 |
2 |
BSP047 |
Logistics & Supply Chain Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP067 |
Advertising & Consumer Behaviour |
15 |
2 |
*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).
4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.
4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components. However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.
4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
5.3 In addition students may choose to be reassessed in BSP028 Strategic Management and BSP027 Management Analysis in January of the next academic year.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc International Management 2015 entry
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert |
Programme title | International Management 2015 entry |
Programme code | BSPT11 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business and international management;
- attract well-qualified students with non-business/management first degrees from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds to facilitate a multi-perspective interactive learning process;
- add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles within them;
- produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
- prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring cultural competence by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
- develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community;
- enhance the employability of our graduates in regard to either their first degree discipline or in a management role;
- encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
- enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations (especially international ones) - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations (especially international ones) operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations (especially international ones) are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and international management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
1 Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP020 |
Human Resource Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP021 |
Accounting and Financial Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP022 |
Marketing Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP023 |
Operations Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP025 |
Business Analysis |
15 |
2 |
BSP032 |
International and Cross Cultural Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP033 |
International Business Environment |
15 |
2 |
BSP031 |
International Management Analysis |
30 |
3 |
BSP028 |
Strategic Management |
15 |
3 |
Semester 2 Option Modules.
In addition to the listed complusory modules, students will choose TWO modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.
INTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENT |
|||
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP034 |
Enterprise, Employability & Personal Development |
15 |
2 |
BSP038 |
Global Outsourcing & Offshoring of Services |
15 |
2 |
BSP040 |
International Marketing |
15 |
2 |
BSP041 |
Small Business & Entrepreneurship |
15 |
2 |
BSP044 |
Services & Retail Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP045 |
Work Psychology |
15 |
2 |
BSP046 |
Enterprise Resource Planning |
15 |
2 |
BSP047 |
Logistics & Supply Chain Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP067 |
Advertising & Consumer Behaviour |
15 |
2 |
*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).
4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.
4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components. However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.
4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
5.3 In addition students may choose to be reassessed in BSP028 Strategic Management and BSP031 International Management Analysis in January of the next academic year.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Finance and Management 2015 entry
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Finance and Management 2015 entry |
Programme code | BSPT12 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/financeandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business, finance and management;
- attract well-qualified students with non-business/management/finance first degrees from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds to facilitate a multi-perspective interactive learning process;
- add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management, finance and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles within them;
- produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business, finance and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
- prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
- develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community;
- enhance the employability of our graduates in regard to either their first degree discipline or in a management role;
- encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
- enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions, processes and financing of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed and financially controlled - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
- how financial markets operate for different financial products in different market and regulatory settings
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business and finance disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business, management and finance by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business, management or finance situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business and finance context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business and finance related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP051 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP054 |
Accounting and Performance Measurement |
15 |
1 |
BSP022 |
Marketing Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP050 |
Foundations of Corporate Finance |
15 |
1 |
BSP025 |
Business Analysis |
15 |
2 |
BSP052 |
Financial Theory and Corporate Policy |
15 |
2 |
BSP053 |
Corporate and Wholesale Finance |
15 |
2 |
BSP060 |
International Financial Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP055 |
Financial Derivatives |
15 |
3 |
BSP056 |
Current Issues in Finance |
15 |
3 |
BSP028 |
Strategic Management |
15 |
3 |
Semester 2 Option Modules.
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose ONE Module, (total modular weight 15) to be chosen from the list below.
FINANCE AND MANAGEMENT |
|||
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP024 |
Business Economics |
15 |
2 |
BSP032 |
International & Cross Cultural Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP033 |
International Business Environment |
15 |
2 |
BSP034 |
Enterprise, Employability & Personal Development |
15 |
2 |
BSP041 |
Small Business & Entrepreneurship |
15 |
2 |
BSP043 |
Business Forecasting |
|
|
BSP044 |
Services & Retail Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP046 |
Enterprise Resource Planning |
15 |
2 |
BSP047 |
Logistics & Supply Chain Management |
15 |
2 |
*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).
4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.
4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components. However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.
4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
5.3 In addition students may choose to be reassessed in BSP028 Strategic Management, BSP055 Financial Derivatives and BSP056 Current Issues in Finance in January of the next academic year.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Marketing and Management 2015 entry
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Marketing and Management 2015 entry |
Programme code | BSPT13 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/marketingandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business, management and marketing;
- attract well-qualified students with non-business/management/marketing first degrees from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds to facilitate a multi-perspective interactive learning process;
- add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management, marketing and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles within them;
- produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business, marketing and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
- prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
- develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community;
- enhance the employability of our graduates in regard to either their first degree discipline or in a management role;
- encourage in our students hard work, enthusiasm and self-motivation, a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and openness to new ideas;
- enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
QAA Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions, processes and of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
- The concepts, methods, processes, management and institutions involved in marketing goods and services
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business, marketing and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business, management or marketing situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques based and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business and marketing context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business, marketing and management related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- use effective team-working skills including leadership, team-building and project management;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP020 |
Human Resource Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP021 |
Accounting and Financial Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP022 |
Marketing Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP025 |
Business Analysis |
15 |
2 |
BSP028 |
Strategic Management |
15 |
3 |
BSP040 |
International Marketing |
15 |
2 |
BSP065 |
Market Research Methods |
15 |
1 |
BSP066 |
Marketing Strategy and Planning |
15 |
2 |
BSP069 |
Marketing Analysis |
30 |
3 |
Semester 2 Optional Modules
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose TWO Modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.
MARKETING & MANAGEMENT |
|||
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP024 |
Business Economics |
15 |
2 |
BSP032 |
International & Cross Cultural Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP033 |
International Business Environment |
15 |
2 |
BSP034 |
Enterprise, Employability & Personal Development |
15 |
2 |
BSP041 |
Small Business & Entrepreneurship |
15 |
2 |
BSP044 |
Services & Retail Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP045 |
Work Psychology |
15 |
2 |
BSP046 |
Enterprise Resource Planning |
15 |
2 |
BSP047 |
Logistics & Supply Chain Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP067 |
Advertising & Consumer Behaviour |
15 |
2 |
*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).
4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.
4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components. However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.
4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
5.3 In addition students may choose to be reassessed in BSP028 Strategic Management and BSP069 Marketing Analysis in January of the next academic year.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Business Analysis and Management 2016 entry
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc /PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Business Analysis and Management |
Programme code | BSPT09 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/businessanalysisandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
-
- add value to first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management and organisations, and assist them to take effective roles in these;
- provide a broad, analytical and integrative study of business and management to well-qualified students from a broad mix of disciplines and backgrounds;
- develop modelling, analysis and consultancy skills and expertise with a strong emphasis on quantitative and IT intensive techniques for handling complex business decision problems to improve business and management practice;
- prepare graduates for a valued career in a wide range of management situations and, in particular, careers as business analysts or business consultants, by developing relevant knowledge and skills;
- enhance students’ lifelong learning skills and personal development so as to be able to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to business and society at large.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context:
- the numerical, analytical and computer based tools, techniques and approaches that are required for the thorough analysis and solution of complex decision problems in a business context, together with the advantages and disadvantages and necessary precautions in using them.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- interpret extensive and complex numerical information to assess and evaluate alternative course of action in business decision making;
- formulate management decision problems in terms of appropriate models, identifying objectives, constraints and alternative options, and assess the validity of such formulations;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- select and apply a range of sophisticated numerical and computer based techniques for analysing and resolving complex decision making problems in business situations;
- interact effectively with other management professionals in assisting them to resolve planning problems;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- apply sophisticated numerical reasoning in solving problems;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- evaluate the merits of different software packages and acquire skills in new software packages quickly;
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP020 |
Human Resource Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP021 |
Accounting and Financial Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP029 |
Marketing in the Organisation |
15 |
1 |
BSP023 |
Operations Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP030 |
Personal Development for Study and Employability |
15 |
1 & 2 |
BSP035 |
Operational Research Methods |
15 |
2 |
BSP043 |
Business Forecasting |
15 |
2 |
BSP039 |
Business Analysis & Planning |
30 |
3 |
BSP028 |
Global Strategic Management |
15 |
3 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTION MODULES
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose TWO modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.
BUSINESS ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT |
|||
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP024 |
Business Economics |
15 |
2 |
BSP026 |
Information Systems and Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP044 |
Services & Retail Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP045 |
Work Psychology |
15 |
2 |
BSP046 |
Enterprise Resource Planning |
15 |
2 |
BSP047 |
Logistics & Supply Chain Management |
15 |
2 |
*Option choices will require approval of the Programme Director.
4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.
4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components. However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.
4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
4.4 Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulsory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided that the ILOs of the programme are still met.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
5.3 In addition students may choose to be reassessed in BSP028 Global Strategic Management and BSP039 Business Analysis and Planning in January of the next academic year.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Management 2016 entry
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert |
Programme title | Management |
Programme code | BSPT10 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/management/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
-
add value to holders of a wide range of first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of management;
- produce high quality graduates with the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of business and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large business and commercial organisations and with taught content that allows students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice;
-
enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.
-
prepare graduates for a significant career in a wide range of roles in management, consultancy and entrepreneurship.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 135)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP020 |
Human Resource Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP021 |
Accounting and Financial Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP029 |
Marketing in the Organisation |
15 |
1 |
BSP023 |
Operations Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP030 |
Personal Development for Study and Employability |
15 |
1 & 2 |
BSP026 |
Information Systems and Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP027 |
Management Analysis |
30 |
3 |
BSP028 |
Global Strategic Management |
15 |
3 |
Semester Two Option Modules
In addition to the listed compulsory Modules, students will choose THREE Modules (total Module weight 45) to be chosen from the list below.
MANAGEMENT |
|||
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP025 |
Business Environment Analysis |
15 |
2 |
BSP040 |
International Marketing |
15 |
2 |
BSP041 |
Small Business & Entrepreneurship |
15 |
2 |
BSP043 |
Business Forecasting |
15 |
2 |
BSP045 |
Work Psychology |
15 |
2 |
BSP046 |
Enterprise Resource Planning |
15 |
2 |
BSP047 |
Logistics & Supply Chain Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP062 |
Brand Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP068 |
Marketing Communications |
15 |
2 |
*Option choices will require approval of the Director of Postgraduate Programmes (Business School).
4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.
4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components. However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.
4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
4.4 Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided that the ILOs of the programme are still met.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
5.3 In addition students may choose to be reassessed in BSP028 Global Strategic Management and BSP027 Management Analysis in January of the next academic year.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc International Management 2016 entry
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert |
Programme title | International Management |
Programme code | BSPT11 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
-
Add value to holders of a wide range of first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of International management, and organisations;
-
Provide a relevant, practical, applied and integrated curriculum through close links with business and commercial organisations and appropriate academic research;
-
Develop appropriate skills to apply knowledge and understanding of International business and management to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
-
Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations (especially international ones) - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external, international context in which organisations (especially international ones) operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed in an international context- including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and international management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the international context.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex international scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in international management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current international business or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of international business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
- Use communication technologies effectively to present and communicate their work to an international audience including specialists and non-specialists.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
1 Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP029 |
Marketing in the Organisation |
15 |
1 |
BSP032 |
Cross Cultural Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP033 |
International Business Environment |
15 |
1 |
BSP038 |
Global Outsourcing and Offshoring of Services |
15 |
1 |
BSP030 |
Personal Development for Study and Employability |
15 |
1 & 2 |
BSP025 |
Business Environment Analysis |
15 |
2 |
BSP040 |
International Marketing |
15 |
2 |
BSP028 |
Global Strategic Management |
15 |
3 |
BSP031 |
International Management Analysis |
30 |
3 |
Semester 2 Option Modules.
In addition to the listed complusory modules, students will choose TWO modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.
INTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENT |
|||
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP036 |
X-Culture |
15 |
2 |
BSP026 |
Information Systems and Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP045 |
Work Psychology |
15 |
2 |
BSP046 |
Enterprise Resource Planning |
15 |
2 |
BSP047 |
Logistics & Supply Chain Management |
15 |
2 |
*Option choices will require approval of the Programme Director.
4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.
4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components. However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.
4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
4.4 Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulsory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided that the ILOs of the programme are still met.
Semester 2 International exchange option
Candidates may replace the modules required for Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits as required by the School of Business and Economics. The module 'Personal Development for Study and Employability' will be continued online during the semester abroad.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
5.3 In addition students may choose to be reassessed in BSP028 Global Strategic Management and BSP031 International Management Analysis in January of the next academic year.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Finance and Management 2016 entry
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Finance and Management |
Programme code | BSPT12 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/financeandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
-
Add value to holders of a wide range of first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of finance, management and organisations;
-
Provide a relevant, practical, applied and integrated curriculum through close links with business and commercial organisations and appropriate academic research
-
Develop appropriate finance skills to apply knowledge and understanding of finance to complex issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
-
Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society;
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The QAA benchmark statement for Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions, processes and financing of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed and financially controlled - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
- how financial markets operate for different financial products in different market and regulatory settings
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business and finance disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business, management and finance by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current business, management or finance situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business and finance context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business and finance related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP020 |
Human Resource Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP054 |
Accounting and Performance Measurement |
15 |
1 |
BSP029 |
Marketing in the Organisation |
15 |
1 |
BSP050 |
Foundations of Corporate Finance |
15 |
1 |
BSP030 |
Personal Development for Study and Employability |
15 |
1 & 2 |
BSP052 |
Financial Theory and Corporate Policy |
15 |
2 |
BSP053 |
Corporate and Wholesale Finance |
15 |
2 |
BSP060 |
International Financial Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP055 |
Financial Derivatives |
15 |
3 |
BSP056 |
Current Issues in Finance |
15 |
3 |
BSP028 |
Global Strategic Management |
15 |
3 |
Semester 2 Option Modules.
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose ONE Module, (total modular weight 15) to be chosen from the list below.
FINANCE AND MANAGEMENT |
|||
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP024 |
Business Economics |
15 |
2 |
BSP025 |
Busines Environment Analysis |
15 |
2 |
BSP041 |
Small Business & Entrepreneurship |
15 |
2 |
BSP043 |
Business Forecasting |
15 |
2 |
BSP044 |
Services & Retail Management |
15 |
2 |
*Option choices will require approval of the Programme Director.
4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.
4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components. However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.
4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
4.4 Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided the ILOs of the programme are still met.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
5.3 In addition students may choose to be reassessed in BSP028 Global Strategic Management, BSP055 Financial Derivatives and BSP056 Current Issues in Finance in January of the next academic year.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Marketing 2016 entry
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Marketing |
Programme code | BSPT13 |
Length of programme | The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twelve calendar months, for the award of PGDip is nine calendar months and for the award of PGCert is three calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/marketingandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
-
Add value to holders of a wide range of first degrees by developing in individuals an integrated and critically aware understanding of marketing, management and organisations;
-
Provide a relevant, practical, applied and integrated curriculum through close links with business and commercial organisations and appropriate academic research;
-
Develop appropriate skills to apply knowledge and understanding of marketing and management to complex marketing issues, both systematically and creatively, to improve business and management practice;
-
Enhance students’ lifelong learning skills, personal development and employability to enable them to work with self-direction and originality and to contribute to and take effective roles within business and society.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
QAA Master’s awards in business and management
The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and holistic understanding of:
- the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations - including their diverse nature, purposes, structures, governance, operations and management, together with the individual and corporate behaviours and cultures which exist within and between organisations and their influence on the external context they operate in;
- the external context in which organisations operate - including economic, environmental, ethical, legal, political, sociological and technological factors, together with their effects at local, national and international levels upon the strategy, behaviour and management of organisations;
- how organisations are managed - including the various processes, procedures and practices for effective leadership and management of organisations with regard to relevant theories, models, frameworks, tasks and roles of management together with rational analysis and other processes of decision making within organisations and in relation to the external context.
- The concepts, methods, processes, management and institutions involved in marketing goods and services
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- analyse and appraise theoretical and practical issues and problems in business, marketing and management by using the theories and models appropriate to those disciplines;
- collect relevant information across a range of areas pertaining to a current marketing or management situation, analyse that information using relevant techniques and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- make effective use of information and communication technologies in a business and marketing context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of marketing and management related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet;
- use effective team-working skills, including team-building and project management in group work situations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- display effective interpersonal skills including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- be open to new ideas and be aware that in many situations there is a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- apply critical thinking and creativity to resolve practical problems;
- solve problems using relevant decision making processes and techniques;
- scan and organise data, abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- make effective use of Communication and Information Technology (CIT);
- recognise and utilise individuals’ contributions in group processes;
- recognise ethical situations, applying ethical and organisational values to situations and choices;
- use effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Module Structure
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 150)
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP020 |
Human Resource Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP021 |
Accounting and Financial Management |
15 |
1 |
BSP029 |
Marketing in the Organisation |
15 |
1 |
BSP061 |
Innovation and Entrepreneurship |
15 |
1 |
BSP030 |
Personal Development for Study and Employability |
15 |
1 & 2 |
BSP064 |
Digital Marketing and Social Media |
15 |
2 |
BSP066 |
Making Marketing Work |
15 |
2 |
BSP063 |
Business Market Review |
15 |
3 |
BSP069 |
Strategic Marketing Solutions |
30 |
3 |
Semester 2 Optional Modules
In addition to the listed compulsory modules, students will choose TWO Modules (total modular weight 30) to be chosen from the list below.
MARKETING |
|||
Code |
Subject Title |
Modular Weight |
Semester |
BSP040 |
International Marketing |
15 |
2 |
BSP044 |
Services & Retail Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP047 |
Logistics & Supply Chain Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP062 |
Brand Management |
15 |
2 |
BSP065 |
Market Research Methods |
15 |
2 |
BSP068 |
Marketing Communications |
15 |
2 |
*Option choices will require approval of the Programme Director.
4.1.1 For full details of when the modules are taught and the specific assessment procedures see Module Specifications.
4.2 Guidance will be given to candidates concerning the selection of optional components. However, the School reserves the right to offer or withdraw any optional module.
4.3 The School reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
4.4 Students who are deemed to have significant knowledge of a compulsory module may be authorised by the Programme Director to undertake an alternative module, provided that the ILOs of the programme are still met.
4.5 Alongside their MSc Marketing programme, students with business background will have the opportunity to study for a Professional Diploma from the Chartered Institute of Marketing.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 In accordance with regulation XXI, candidates who have a right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
5.3 In addition students may choose to be reassessed in BSPxxx Business Market review and BSP069 Strategic Marketing Solutions in January of the next academic year.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Automotive Retail Management (2004 to August 2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body |
|
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Automotive Retail Management |
Programme code | BSPT32 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum and maximum periods of study for the awards covered by these regulations are specified in Regulation XXI. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See:http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/automotiveretailmanagement/
In addition: - With the permission of the Programme Director 100 credits may be obtained towards the award of MSc on the basis of successful completion of the Professional Diploma in Retail Automotive Management. - With the permission of the Programme Director 50 credits my be obtained towards the award of Diploma on the basis of successful completion of Professional Certificate in Retail Automotive Management. - Candidates who have gained credits in modules from the Professional Certificate / Diploma in Retail Automotive are eligible to transfer these credits towards the awards of Postgraduate Certificate / Diploma MSc Automotive Retail Management. Credits awarded under this provision will be at the discretion of the Programme Director. - Continuing Professional Development candidates wishing to be considered for the award of Postgraduate Certificate must have undertaken only 6 modules from the list below and have fulfilled the requirements for Certificate outlined in 5. below. For the Diploma, candidates must have undertaken only 12 modules from the list below and have fulfilled the requirements outlined in 5. below. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
- The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
- The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
- The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
- The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
- The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
- The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
- The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
- The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
- establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
- use of models of business situations and research skills;
- identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
- recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
- conduct research into business and management issues;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
- perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
- use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
- employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
- demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
- set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight 30)
Module Weight
BSPP01 |
Introduction to Automotive Retail Management
|
10 |
BSPP05/BSPN56 |
Managing Business Performance
|
10 |
BSPP09/BSPN50 |
Introduction to Business Planning
|
10 |
4.2 Optional Subjects
BSPP13 |
Maximising Performance through people
|
10 |
BSPP17 |
Creating a Marketing Plan
|
10 |
BSPP21/BSPN57 |
Managing Quality
|
10 |
BSPP25 |
Building Successful Teams
|
10 |
BSPP29/BSPN51 |
Generating Customer Loyalty
|
10 |
BSPP33 |
Creating a Business Plan
|
10 |
BSPP35/BSPN52
|
Operations Management |
10 |
BSPP36/BSPN65
|
Management and leadership Skills |
10 |
BSPP65 |
Introduction to Employment Law
|
10 |
BSPP69 |
Analysing and Budgeting for Your Business
|
10 |
BSPP73 |
Introduction to Product and Consumer Law
|
10 |
BSPP85/BSPN58 |
Improving Performance through Coaching
|
10 |
BSPP89/BSPN64 |
Financial Skills for Non-Financial Managers
|
10 |
BSPP90/BSPN59 |
Change Management
|
10 |
BSPP91/BSPN53 |
Foundations of Management |
10
|
BSPP92/BSPN54 |
Finance for Managers |
10
|
BSPP93/BSPN55 |
Decisions Systems |
10
|
BSPP94/BSPN63 |
Human Resources Management |
10
|
BSPP95/BSPN60 |
Marketing Strategy |
10
|
BSPP96/BSPN61 |
Digital and Social Media in the Retail Car Market |
10
|
BSPP97/BSPN62 |
Cross Cultural Market Development |
10
|
BSP695 |
Operations Management for the Accident Repair Centre
|
10 |
4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)
BSP732/BSPN03 |
Strategic Dealership Management
|
15 |
BSP746/BSPN04 |
Retail Marketing Strategy
|
15 |
BSP731† |
Project
|
30 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1 To be eligible for the award of the Postgraduate Certificate in Automotive Retail Management, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits, comprising 30 credits from the compulsory modules listed in 4.1 and 30 credits from the optional modules in 4.2.
At the discretion of the Programme Director candidates for the Certificate may substitute for the modules listed in 4.2 any similar modules with an equivalent or greater weight from the School of Business and Economics suite of postgraduate modules.
5.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120 from the modules listed in 4.1 and 4.2.
5.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.2 and in addition must complete 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.
Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Automotive Retail Management (2014 + 2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body |
|
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Automotive Retail Management |
Programme code | BSPT32 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of the MSc is thirty six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of the Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See:http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/automotiveretailmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
K1. The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
K2. The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
K3. The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
K4. The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
K9. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
K10. The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships;
K11. The role of digital and social media within the context of the retail automotive environment;
K12. The development of resilient and sustainable organisations within the retail automotive sector;
K13. The potential future development of the automotive industry and the role of retailing within it ;
K14. The international context in which the retail automotive sector operates;
K15. The issues of managing in a multi-cultural environment ;
K16. The knowledge of how sales and marketing activity needs to embrace international cultures.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. Manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
C2. Establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
C3. Use of models of business situations and research skills;
C4. Identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
C5. Recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
C6. Conduct research into business and management issues;
C7. Learn through reflection on practice and experience;
C8. View the organisation from the perspective of sustainability and resilience;
C9. Recognise the management implications of different international cultures;
C10. Recognise the nuances of managing in an international context.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. Apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
P2. Perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
P3. Use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
P4. Engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
P5. Create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
P6. Make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
P7. Employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
P8. Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research;
P9. Use Social and Digital Media within the context of the retail automotive sector.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
T1. Create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
T2. Organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
T3. Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
T4. Listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
T5. Use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
T6. Demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
T7. Set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
T8. Interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
T9. Manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning;
T10. Demonstrate the ability to operate appropriately in an international context.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight 60)
Mmodule Weight
BSPP09/BSPN50 |
Introduction to Business Planning
|
10 |
BSPP29/BSPN51 |
Generating Customer Loyalty
|
10 |
BSPP35/BSPN52 |
Operations Management
|
10 |
BSPP91/BSPN53 |
Foundations of Management
|
10 |
BSPP92/BSPN54 |
Finance for Managers
|
10 |
BSPP93/BSPN55 |
Decision Systems
|
10 |
4.2 Optional Subjects (total modular weight 60)
BSPP05/BSPN56 |
Managing Business Performance |
10 |
BSPP21/BSPN57 |
Managing Quality |
10 |
BSPP36/BSPN65 |
Management and Leadership Skills |
10 |
BSPP85/BSPN58 |
Improving Performance Through Coaching |
10 |
BSPP90/BSPN59 |
Change Management |
10 |
BSPP94/BSPN63 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSPP95/BSPN60 |
Marketing Strategy |
10 |
BSPP96/BSPN61 |
Digital and Social Media in the Retail Car Market |
10 |
BSPP97/BSPN62 |
Cross Cultural Market Development |
10 |
4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)
BSP732/BSPN03 |
Strategic Dealership Management
|
15 |
BSP746/BSPN04 |
Retail Marketing Strategy
|
15 |
BSP738/BSPN09 |
Managing Enterprise and Innovation
|
15 |
BSP739/BSPN10 |
Cross Cultural and International Management
|
15 |
BSP745†/BSPN12† |
Project
|
30 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
To complete the PGCert in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 6 x 10 credit modules. To complete the PGDip in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 12 x 10 credit modules, 6 of which should be chosen from those offered in Section 4.2. To complete the MSc in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 12 x 10 credit modules and 60 credits from those offered in Section 4.3 to include BSP745/BSPN12 30 credit Project. Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.
4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1 To be eligible for the award of the Postgraduate Certificate in Automotive Retail Management, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits, from the modules listed in 4.1
At the discretion of the Programme Director candidates for the Certificate may substitute for the modules listed in 4.1 with any similar modules with an equivalent or greater weight from the School of Business and Economics suite of postgraduate modules.
5.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120 from the modules listed in 4.1 and 4.2.
5.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.2 and in addition must complete 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3. Candidates who have completed BSPP96 cannot undertake BSP739.
Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Automotive Retail Management (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body |
|
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Automotive Retail Management |
Programme code | BSPT32 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of the MSc is thirty six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of the Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See:http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/automotiveretailmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
K1. The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
K2. The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
K3. The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
K4. The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
K9. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
K10. The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships;
K11. The role of digital and social media within the context of the retail automotive environment;
K12. The development of resilient and sustainable organisations within the retail automotive sector;
K13. The potential future development of the automotive industry and the role of retailing within it ;
K14. The international context in which the retail automotive sector operates;
K15. The issues of managing in a multi-cultural environment ;
K16. The knowledge of how sales and marketing activity needs to embrace international cultures.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. Manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
C2. Establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
C3. Use of models of business situations and research skills;
C4. Identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
C5. Recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
C6. Conduct research into business and management issues;
C7. Learn through reflection on practice and experience;
C8. View the organisation from the perspective of sustainability and resilience;
C9. Recognise the management implications of different international cultures;
C10. Recognise the nuances of managing in an international context.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. Apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
P2. Perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
P3. Use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
P4. Engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
P5. Create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
P6. Make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
P7. Employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
P8. Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research;
P9. Use Social and Digital Media within the context of the retail automotive sector.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
T1. Create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
T2. Organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
T3. Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
T4. Listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
T5. Use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
T6. Demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
T7. Set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
T8. Interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
T9. Manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning;
T10. Demonstrate the ability to operate appropriately in an international context.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight 40)
Mmodule Weight
BSPN50 |
Introduction to Business Planning
|
10 |
BSPN52 |
Operations Management
|
10 |
BSPN53 |
Foundations of Management
|
10 |
BSPN54 |
Finance for Managers
|
10 |
4.2 Optional Subjects (total modular weight 80)
BSPN51 |
Generating Customer Loyalty |
10 |
BSPN55 |
Decision Systems |
10 |
BSPN56 |
Managing Business Performance |
10 |
BSPN57 |
Managing Quality |
10 |
BSPN58 |
Improving Performance Through Coaching |
10 |
BSPN65 |
Management and Leadership Skills |
10 |
BSPN59 |
Change Management |
10 |
BSPN63 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSPN60 |
Marketing Strategy |
10 |
BSPN61 |
Digital and Social Media in the Retail Car Market |
10 |
BSPN62 |
Cross Cultural Market Development |
10 |
4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)
BSPN03 |
Strategic Dealership Management
|
15 |
BSPN04 |
Retail Marketing Strategy
|
15 |
BSPN12† |
Project
|
30 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
To complete the PGCert in Automotive Retail Management students must complete the 4 x 10 credit compulsory modules and 2 x 10 credit optional modules from those offered in Section 4.2. To complete the PGDip in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 12 x 10 credit modules, 8 of which should be chosen from those offered in Section 4.2. To complete the MSc in Automotive Retail Management students must complete 12 x 10 credit modules and 60 credits from those offered in Section 4.3. Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.
4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1 To be eligible for the award of the Postgraduate Certificate in Automotive Retail Management, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits: the modules listed in 4.1 and 2 options
At the discretion of the Programme Director candidates for the Certificate may substitute for the modules listed in 4.1 with any similar modules with an equivalent or greater weight from the School of Business and Economics suite of postgraduate modules.
5.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120 from the modules listed in 4.1 and 4.2.
5.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc in Automotive Retail Management candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.2 and in addition must complete 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.
Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Healthcare Management and Governance (Sept 2013 to August 2015)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert |
Programme title | Healthcare Management and Governance |
Programme code | BSPT56 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | Entrance Requirements to the programme are: i) possession of a degree or equivalent or ii) possession of the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution; or iii) hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
This multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Healthcare Management and Governance is aimed at professional healthcare managers, those wishing to move from another field within healthcare and those working in specialist management areas wishing to broaden their expertise.
The programme is delivered as a series of short courses for part-time study and aims to:
- Provide a current view of management and governance in healthcare encompassing both organisational issues and specialist areas. It particularly focuses on the integration of management processes into strategic and operational planning for the provision of a high quality health service;
- Develop participants knowledge, increase job competencies and develop professional potential; and
- Suit the needs of working professionals who do not have an opportunity for full-time study.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist programme for career development in that it is intended to prepare health professionals for a specialist career pathway.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- The framework of governance in healthcare will be taught by means of short lectures, group work and discussion with examples of systems and structures being given by the lecturers.
- Tools and techniques used in healthcare governance will be taught by means of lectures, case studies and syndicate exercises.
- Governance principles and practice relevant to the healthcare sector will be taught by means of case study analysis, lectures and group work. The emphasis in this element will be upon enabling the students to develop critical thinking in respect of the application of general principles to particular situations.
- Systems and healthcare governance will be taught by means of lecture and case study review. An overview of systems theory in healthcare will form an integral part of the teaching of this element.
- Research methodology will be taught by means of lectures, group work and syndicate discussions. The essentially individual nature of research undertaken by students will necessitate the support of much of the formal teaching by guided study and reading and individual work within the tutorial sessions.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Identify methods for establishing an effective and integrated management and governance system. This will be taught by means of lectures and group work including the analysis of case study materials and presentation of results
- Assess a range of risk assessment tools and select the most appropriate for use in given situations will be taught by means of short lectures and analysis of case study materials.
- Critically analyse healthcare management and governance issues and present possible intervention strategies will be taught by means of short lectures, cases study analysis group work and syndicate exercises.
- Evaluate the effectiveness of any interventions this will be taught by means of lectures and short presentations, case study analysis and group work. The emphasis will be upon the development of a critical facility that will enable the selection of the most appropriate criteria for intervention evaluation.
- Guided reading and encouragement to use on-line data sources will also serve to enhance the attainment of all of these intended learning outcomes.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Produce management systems and related policies for their organization will be taught by means of lectures and guided discussions, group work and short presentations
- Use a range of risk assessment tools and carry out risk assessments within their own organization this will be taught by means of lecture, case study analysis and other group work.
- Devise and maintain systems for the collection, interpretation and presentation of data on untoward incidents will be taught by means of lectures and case study review. Students will be encouraged to examine and evaluate the data collection systems within their own organization. This will be reinforced and supported within the tutorial sessions
- Develop effective risk control strategies for healthcare will be taught by means of group work and discussion, short lectures and case study evaluation. Emphasis will be placed upon the development of systems that are both robust and cost-effective.
- Design a research tool appropriate to healthcare governance management will be taught by means of lectures, group work and guided reading. This will be supported by individual guided study facilitated by means of the tutorial sessions.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Establish management systems [will be taught by means of lectures, group work and discussion and case study analysis. Guided reading will reinforce learning]
- Communicate with a range of stakeholders will be taught by means of case study analysis and discussion , group work (including videoed group work), role play and short lectures.
- Motivate others to take action [will be taught by means of lectures, case study analysis, group discussions and role play]
- Present technical and complex concepts in a form which is understandable to managers will be taught by means of case study review, group work, role play and short lectures.
- Use information systems and communications technology, and knowledge management appropriately in acquiring analyzing and communicating information [will be taught by means of demonstrations, short lectures, group work and guided reading. Students will be encouraged further to access on-line data sources]
- Develop research skills, including data collection, analysis and presentation [will be taught by means of lectures, group work, case study analysis and guided reading. This will be enhanced and reinforced through tutorials]
4. Programme structure
4.1 Modules
|
|
Modular Weight |
BSP670 |
Knowledge Management and Information Systems |
20
|
BSP672+ |
Governance in Healthcare |
20
|
BSP678+ |
Healthcare Environment |
20
|
BSP673$
|
Performance and Strategic Management |
20
|
BSP679$
|
Strategic Planning and Budgeting |
20 |
BSP674# |
Leadership and Management in Healthcare |
20
|
BSP680# |
Leadership in Healthcare |
20
|
BSP675 |
Managing Risk |
20
|
BSP676 |
Research Methods in the Business of Healthcare |
20
|
BSP677* |
Masters Project |
60 |
* by distance learning
4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate candidates must have accumulated 60 credits. Candidates may undertake either BSP672+ or BSP678+, plus either BSP673$ or BSP679$, plus either BSP679# or BSP674#.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120.
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all of the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from BSP677, the Masters Project.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Healthcare Management and Governance (Oct 2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | n/a |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert |
Programme title | Healthcare Management and Governance |
Programme code | BSPT56 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | n/a |
Admissions criteria | see: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/healthcare-management-governance/ Entrance Requirements to the programme are: i) possession of a degree or equivalent or ii) possession of the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution; or iii) hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- provide a current view of management and governance in healthcare encompassing both organisational issues and specialist areas.
- develop skills in the integration of management processes into strategic and operational planning for the provision of a high quality health service;
- develop participants knowledge, increase job competencies and develop professional potential.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications/Descriptors for a Higher Education qualification at Level 7.
- The benchmark statement for Masters awards in business and management
- School of Business and Economics Business Plan
- ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- The University academic quality procedures
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1 The framework of governance principles and practice relevant to the healthcare sector;
K2 The tools and techniques used in healthcare governance and their application to strategic and operational planning;
K3 The principles of risk management, risk perception and risk communication;
K4 The concept, assessment and evaluation of contemporary resilience thoughts and ideas; the importance of emergency preparedness, resilience and response in the context of Health and Social Care;
K5 The role of knowledge management and information technology in the provision of patient focused healthcare;
K6 The knowledge and skills for the effective use of accounting and financial information;
K7 The principles of leadership and people management, organizational culture and crisis settings.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1 analyse and identify methods for establishing an effective and integrated management and governance system;
C2 select the most appropriate risk assessment tools;
C3 develop critical thinking to the application of general principles in particular situations;
C4 select the most appropriate criteria for intervention evaluation;
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1 establish and implement a governance operating system that provides assurances to healthcare boards;
P2 select the most appropriate risk assessment tools and carry out risk assessments within their own organization; select the most appropriate criteria for intervention evaluation;
P3 examine and evaluate the data collection systems within their own organization;
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
T1 create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions and deliver critically evaluative reports;
T2 scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
T3 listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
T4 use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
T5 use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
T6 carry out small scale research projects using data collection, analysis and presentation methods.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Core Modules
|
|
Modular Weight |
BSPR01 |
What is Resilience |
15 |
BSPR02 |
Risk Management |
15 |
BSPR23 |
Leadership and Management |
15 |
BSPH01 |
Financial Management |
15 |
BSPR20 |
Performance and Strategic Management |
15 |
BSPR21 |
Governance in Healthcare |
15 |
BSPR22 |
Knowledge Management and Information Systems |
15
|
BSPR31 |
Health and Societal Resilience in Context |
15
|
BSPA01* |
Masters Research Project |
60 |
* partially by distance learning (>50%)
To complete the PG Cert in Healthcare Management and Governance students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules. To complete the PG Dip in Healthcare Management and Governance students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules. To complete the MSc in Healthcare Management and Governance students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit research project. Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.
4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits from the modules listed in Section 4 specifically, BSPR01; BSPR02; BSPR23 and BSPH01.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the compulsory modules from Section 4 (not including BSPA01).
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits module BSPA01.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re- assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Leadership and Management (Building Societies Association)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert (available as entry as well as exit awards) |
Programme title | Leadership and Management |
Programme code | BSPT64 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/management-leadership/
and the following:
Entrance Requirements to the programme are: i) Possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution; Or iii) Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal education
See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the building societies sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for leadership and management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the sector.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications/Descriptors for a Higher Education qualification at Level 7
- School of Business and Economics Business Plan
- ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Learning and Teaching Strategy
- The University academic quality procedures
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
K1. The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
K2. The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix that support organisational strategy;
K3. Operations management of products and services to support effective and efficient resource use and process design;
K4. The financing of the business enterprise: sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
K5. The characteristics of the leadership and management roles; the leadership, management and development of people within organisations; organisational behavior and culture, human resource management and leading change; managing well-being in organisations; evidence-based leadership and management;
Specific to PGDip/MSc:-
K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
K7. Critically assess the role of leadership in decision evaluation.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal; recognise the need for systematic thinking and cross-functional approaches
C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, evaluating and solving business problems;
C3. conduct critical analyses of management research and practice; source, analyse and evaluate business-related data from a wide variety of organizational, professional and research sources;
C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations.
Specific to PGDip/MSc:-
C5. assess the relationship between value-focused evaluation and decision outcomes.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports; produce written communication that argues the business case, supported by valid and reliable evidence;
P2. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
P3. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
P4. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills to aid decision-making;
Specific to PGDip/MSc:-
P5. model reflexive practice such that they can teach others the benefits of goal-setting, reflection and analysis for the development of self and the business; adapt their management and leadership approach to meet the context and environment in which they operate;
P6. perform effectively as a team leader and team member, recognising and applying each individual’s contributions, including team selection, team development, delegation, and management;
P7. engage in oral communication that achieves objectives, including listening, negotiating, persuading and influencing.
c. Key transferable skills:
c. Key transferable skills:
T1. Use a wide range of data to identify, create and evaluate options for strategic and operational decision making;
T2. Organise and synthesis multiple forms of information to abstract meaning and share knowledge
T3. Engagement with information technology and other forms of media to effectively communicate information;
T4. Use of listening and negotiation skills to persuade or influence others;
T5. Apply effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
Specific to MSc:-
T6. Successfully manage a project through the whole project cycle; from idea creation, planning, data collection and analysis, development of compelling recommendations and conclusions, through to final submission.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Modules
Code |
Module Title |
Modular Weight |
BSPH01 |
Financial Management |
15 |
BSPH02 |
Managing and Leading People |
15 |
BSPH03 |
Operations Management |
15 |
BSPH04 |
Marketing Management |
15 |
BSPH11 |
Information Management and Governance |
15 |
BSPH15 |
Leadership and Change |
15 |
BSPH41 | Value Focused Decision Making | 15 |
BSPH52 | Strategy and Planning | 15 |
BSPA01† | Masters Research Project | 60 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
To complete the PG Cert in Leadership and Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules. To complete the PG Dip in Leadership and Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules. To complete the MSc in Leadership and Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit research project. Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.
4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
4.3 Exemptions
Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 15 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Leadership and Management and the MSc in Leadership and Management.
- Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
- Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
- Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
- Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
- Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
- Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.1 specifically, BSPH01; BSPH02; BSPH03 and BSPH04.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the modules from 4.1 (modular weight 120, not including BSPA01).
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits module BSPA01.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
n/a
Programme Specification
BS MSc Management and Leadership (Professional) (Aggregate Industries) (Sept 2013, 2014 and 2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Management and Leadership (Professional) |
Programme code | BSPT62 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/management-leadership/
and the following:
Entrance Requirements to the programme are: i) possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director. 1.5 Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies (subject to the approval of the Programme Director) may count 10 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership.
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance the career development and employability of participants;
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with Aggregate Industries.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
- The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
- The financing of the business enterprise: sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
- The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
- The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
- The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
- establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
- use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
- recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
- conduct research into business and management issues;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- apply leadership and performance management techniques, selecting the appropriate style for situations;
- perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
- use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
- employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
- demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
- set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
- enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Modules
4.1.1 (total modular weight 120)
BSP901 |
Foundations of Management Learning & Personal Development |
10 |
BSP902 |
Transformational Leadership and Change Management |
20 |
BSP903 |
Information & Knowledge Management |
10 |
BSP904 |
Financial Management |
20 |
BSP906 |
Strategic Marketing Management |
20 |
BSP907 |
Strategic & Operations Management |
20 |
BSP963 |
Project Management 1 |
10 |
BSP928 |
Project Management 2 |
10 |
4.2 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)
BSP763 |
Masters Project |
60 |
4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also to be eligible for the award of MSc in Management & Leadership (Professional) must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Management and Leadership (Higher Education Administration) (Sept 2008 to Aug 2011 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Management and Leadership |
Programme code | BSPT66 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma is eighteen calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | Entrance Requirements to the Postgraduate Diploma are: Either i) possession of a degree or equivalent. Or ii) possession of at least three years’ administrative/managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate administrative position, as determined by the Programme Director. Or iii) possession of the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Management.
See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for management and administrative roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance the career development and employability of participants;
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with Higher Education Institutions.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- The impact of contextual forces on Higher Education Institutions including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
- The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
- The financing of the Higher Education Institutions: sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
- The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
- The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
- The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
- establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
- use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
- explore quality issues pertaining to higher education;
- recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
- conduct research into higher education management issues;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
- perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
- use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- implement recruitment and select processes successfully;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
- employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research;
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- scan and organise data and abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
- demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
- set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
- enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisations.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight 120)
Module Weight
BSP856 |
Financial Management 2 |
20
|
BSP861 |
Planning and Operations 2 |
20
|
BSP866 |
Human Resource Management 2 |
15
|
BSP871 |
Information Management 2 |
20
|
BSP876 |
Leading Administrative Issues: Higher Education Environment 2
|
20 |
BSP877 |
Personnel Management 2: Policy and Procedural Issues |
15 |
BSP761* |
Research Project Proposal |
10 |
4.2 MSc Subjects
BSP763† |
Masters Project |
60 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
4.3 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available. Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
4.5 Exemptions
Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Diploma in Management prior to 2001 may count 100 credits towards the award of an MSc.
Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Diploma in Management after 2001 may count 120 credits towards the award of an MSc.
Candidates who have been awarded the Association of University Administrators Postgraduate Certificate in Professional Practice awarded by the Open University may count 25 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵUniversity Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership at the discretion of the Programme Director.
Candidates who are members of the Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accouting (CIPFA) may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 20 credits towards the Diploma.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.1.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20 from the modules listed in 4.1.
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisified all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Management and Leadership (N G Bailey) (Sept 2007 to Aug 2008 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Management and Leadership |
Programme code | BSPT77 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | Entrance Requirements to the programme are: i) possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance the career development and employability of participants;
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the N G Bailey Organisation.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
- The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
- The financing of the business enterprise: sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
- The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
- The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
- The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
- establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
- use models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
- recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
- conduct research into business and management issues;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- apply leadership and performance management techniques, selecting the appropriate style for situations;
- perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
- use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
- employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
- demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
- set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
- enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Modules
4.1.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 60) Module Weight
BSP933 |
Understanding Self and Career 1: Implications for Leadership |
10 |
BSP938 |
Financial Management 1 |
10 |
BSP943 |
Planning 1 |
10 |
BSP948 |
Leading Individuals and Teams 1 |
10 |
BSP953 |
Information Management 1 |
10 |
BSP959 |
Marketing 1 |
5 |
BSP963 |
Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility 1 |
5 |
4.1.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 60
BSP911 |
Financial Management 2 |
10 |
BSP914 |
Operations 2 |
10 |
BSP917 |
Transformational Leadership and Change 2 |
10 |
BSP920 |
Information Management 2 |
10 |
BSP923 |
Strategic Marketing Management 2 |
10 |
BSP928 |
Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility 2 |
10 |
4.2 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)
BSP763† |
Masters Project |
60 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the level 1 modules listed in 4.1. This specific reqirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the level 1 and level 2 modules from 4.1.1 and 4.1.2.
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisified all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.2.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Management and Leadership (Public) (Sept 2008 to Aug 2013)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert |
Programme title | Management and Leadership |
Programme code | BSPT60 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementleadership/
and the following:
Entrance Requirements to the programme are: i) possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.
See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance the career development and employability of participants;
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with business organisations.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
- The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
- The financing of the business enterprise: sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
- The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
- The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
- The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
- establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
- use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
- recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
- conduct research into business and management issues;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
- perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
- use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
- employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
- demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
- set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
- enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisations.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Subjects
4.1.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 50)
|
|
Module Weight |
BSP805 |
Financial Management 1 |
10 |
BSP810 |
Planning and Operations 1 |
10 |
BSP815 |
Leading People to Influence Performance 1 |
10 |
BSP820 |
Information Management 1 |
10 |
BSP825 |
Marketing 1 |
10 |
4.1.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 50)
BSP855 |
Financial Management 2 |
10 |
BSP860 |
Planning and Operations 2 |
10 |
BSP865 |
Leading the Team 2 |
10 |
BSP870 |
Information Management 2 |
10 |
BSP875 |
Strategic Marketing Management 2 |
10 |
4.2 Optional Subjects
4.2.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 10)
BSP830 |
Sales and Marketing 1 |
10 |
BSP832 |
Retailing 1 |
10 |
BSP834 |
Total Quality 1 |
10 |
BSP836 |
Selling Skills 1 |
10 |
BSP838 |
Problem Solving and Decision Making 1 |
10 |
BSP840 |
Occupational Health & Safety Management 1 |
10 |
BSP842 |
Merchandising |
10 |
BSP844 |
Effective Management in Small Firms 1 |
10 |
BSP846 |
Managing Small Business Growth 1 |
10 |
BSP847 |
The Self-Managed Coach 1 |
10 |
BSP885 |
Personnel Management 1 |
10 |
4.2.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 10)
BSP848 |
The Self-Managed Coach 2 |
10 |
BSP880 |
Retailing 2 |
10 |
BSP882 |
Total Quality 2 |
10 |
BSP884 |
Sales Management 2 |
10 |
BSP886 |
Forecasting and Decision Making 2 |
10 |
BSP888 |
Personnel Management 2 |
10 |
BSP892 |
New Product and Service Development 2 |
10 |
BSP894 |
Effective Management in Small Firms 2 |
10 |
BSP896 |
Managing Small Business Growth 2 |
10 |
4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)
BSP763† |
Masters Project |
60 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available. Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.
4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
4.6 Exemptions
With the permission of the Programme Director 60 credits may be obtained towards the award of Diploma on the basis of successful completion of all modules on the Postgraduate Certificate in Continuing Professional Development.
Candidates with the award of ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Certificate in Management may count 60 credits towards the award of Diploma.
Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Diploma in Management prior to 2001 may count 100 credits towards the award of an MSc.
Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Diploma in Management after 2001 may count 120 credits towards the award of an MSc.
Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 10 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership. Such candidates who already hold the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate (as outlined in 1.6 above) would only be able to count an additional 10 credits to the 60 credits they already have.
- Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
- Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
- Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
- Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
- Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
- Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete all of the level 1 modules listed in 4.1.1 (modular weight 50 credits) and one level 1 module from those listed in 4.2.1 (modular weight 10 credits). This specific requirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the compulsory level 1 and level 2 modules from 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 (modular weight 100), one optional level 1 module from 4.2.1 (modular weight 10) and, one optional level 2 module from 4.2.2 (modular weight 10). This specific requirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director. The optional modules taken at level 2 should complement those taken at level 1.
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisified all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Management and Leadership (Public) (Sept 2013 to Aug 2015)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip/ PGCert |
Programme title | Management and Leadership |
Programme code | BSPT60 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and eighteen calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementleadership/
and the following:
Entrance Requirements to the programme are: i) possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) possession of the requisite managerial experience, and normally with employment in an appropriate management position, as determined by the Programme Director.
See also Exemptions under Programme Structure below.
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance the career development and employability of participants;
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with business organisations.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
- The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
- The financing of the business enterprise: sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
- The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
- The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
- The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
- establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
- use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
- recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
- conduct research into business and management issues;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
- perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
- use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
- employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
- demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
- set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
- enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisations.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Subjects
4.1.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 50)
|
|
Module Weight |
BSP805 |
Understanding Financial Information |
10 |
BSP810 |
Planning |
10 |
BSP815 |
Leadership and Influence |
10 |
BSP820 |
Information Management 1 |
10 |
BSP825 |
Marketing |
10 |
4.1.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 50)
BSP855 |
Financial Information for Managers |
10 |
BSP860 |
Operations Management |
10 |
BSP865 |
Leading Teams and Change |
10 |
BSP870 |
Information Management 2 |
10 |
BSP875 |
Strategic Marketing Management |
10 |
4.2 Optional Subjects
4.2.1 Level 1 (total modular weight 10)
BSP830 |
Sales and Marketing |
10 |
BSP832 |
Retailing 1 |
10 |
BSP834 |
Total Quality 1 |
10 |
BSP836 |
Selling Skills |
10 |
BSP838 |
Problem Solving and Decision Making |
10 |
BSP840 |
Occupational Health & Safety Management |
10 |
BSP842 |
Merchandising |
10 |
BSP844 |
Effective Management in Small Firms 1 |
10 |
BSP846 |
Managing Small Business Growth 1 |
10 |
BSP847 |
Coaching for Impact 1 |
10 |
BSP885 |
Personnel Management 1 |
10 |
4.2.2 Level 2 (total modular weight 10)
BSP848 |
Coaching for Impact 2 |
10 |
BSP880 |
Retailing 2 |
10 |
BSP882 |
Total Quality 2 |
10 |
BSP884 |
Sales Management |
10 |
BSP886 |
Forecasting and Decision Making |
10 |
BSP888 |
Personnel Management 2 |
10 |
BSP892 |
New Product and Service Development |
10 |
BSP894 |
Effective Management in Small Firms 2 |
10 |
BSP896 |
Managing Small Business Growth 2 |
10 |
4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight 60)
BSP763† |
Masters Project |
60 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available. Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.
4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
4.6 Exemptions
With the permission of the Programme Director 60 credits may be obtained towards the award of Diploma on the basis of successful completion of all modules on the Postgraduate Certificate in Continuing Professional Development.
Candidates with the award of ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Certificate in Management may count 60 credits towards the award of Diploma.
Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Diploma in Management prior to 2001 may count 100 credits towards the award of an MSc.
Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Professional Diploma in Management after 2001 may count 120 credits towards the award of an MSc.
Candidates who are members of the following approved accountancy bodies may, at the discretion of the Programme Director, count 10 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Management and Leadership or 20 credits towards the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Management and Leadership. Such candidates who already hold the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate (as outlined in 1.6 above) would only be able to count an additional 10 credits to the 60 credits they already have.
- Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA)
- Chartered Institute of Management Accounts (CIMA)
- Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accounting (CIPFA)
- Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW)
- Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS)
- Institute of Chartered Accountants of Ireland (ICAI)
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete all of the level 1 modules listed in 4.1.1 (modular weight 50 credits) and one level 1 module from those listed in 4.2.1 (modular weight 10 credits). This specific requirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed all of the compulsory level 1 and level 2 modules from 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 (modular weight 100), one optional level 1 module from 4.2.1 (modular weight 10) and, one optional level 2 module from 4.2.2 (modular weight 10). This specific requirement may however be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director. The optional modules taken at level 2 should complement those taken at level 1.
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 100 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 20.
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition must have achieved 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2005- Sept 2009 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Occupational Health and Safety Management |
Programme code | BSPT50 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/occupationalhealthandsafetymanagement/ and also the following: Entrance requirements to the programme: i) possession of a degree or equivalent from a Higher Education institute of the UK; Or ii) have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British chartered professional body; Or iii) hold any other relevant qualification and experience approved by the University.
Exemptions Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by the: i) National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or the ii) British Safety Council and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or iii) a Diploma in Occupational Safety and Health from another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSP540–BSP544 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.
The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
- enhance the career development and employability of participants;
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
- the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the structure and application of occupational health and safety law;
- advanced risk assessment techniques;
- the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;
- the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
- the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
- the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;
- the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;
- establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;
- assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;
- critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;
- employ qualitative and quantitative skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety-related materials including journals, legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
- enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Modules
|
|
Module Weight |
BSP540 |
Occupational Health and Safety and the Law |
15 |
BSP541 |
Risk Management |
15 |
BSP542* |
Management of Physical Hazards |
15 |
BSP543* |
Occupational Health Management |
15 |
BSP544 |
Safety and the Management of People |
15 |
BSP545† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management: Practical Project |
45 |
BSP546† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management: Practical Project |
45 |
BSP514† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management: Research Project |
60 |
BSP547†/BSPA01† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management: Research Project |
60 |
* by distance learning
† partially by distance learning (>50%)
4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSP540, BSP541 and two others chosen from BSP542-544.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP540-545 inclusive.
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.
5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSP514 or BSP547/BSPA01.
Candidates must have also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.
5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP546 and BSP547/BSPA01.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2009- Sept 2011 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Occupational Health and Safety Management |
Programme code | BSPT50 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/occupationalhealthandsafetymanagement/ and also the following: Entrance requirements to the programme: i) Possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution. Or iii) Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.
Exemptions Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by the: i) National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health (National Diploma) and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or the ii) British Safety Council Level 6 and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or iii) a Diploma in Occupational Safety and Health from another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSP540–BSP544 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.
The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
- enhance the career development and employability of participants;
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
- the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the structure and application of occupational health and safety law;
- advanced risk assessment techniques;
- the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;
- the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
- the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
- the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;
- the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;
- establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;
- assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;
- critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;
- employ qualitative and quantitative skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety-related materials including journals, legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
- enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Modules
|
|
Module Weight |
BSP540 |
Occupational Health and Safety and the Law |
15 |
BSP541 |
Risk Management |
15 |
BSP542* |
Management of Physical Hazards |
15 |
BSP543* |
Occupational Health Management |
15 |
BSP544 |
Safety and the Management of People |
15 |
BSP545† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project |
45 |
BSP546† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project |
45 |
BSP514† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project |
60 |
BSP547†/BSPA01† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project |
60 |
* by distance learning
† partially by distance learning (>50%)
4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSP540, BSP541 and two others chosen from BSP542-544.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP540-545 inclusive.
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.
5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSP514 or BSP547/BSPA01.
Candidates must have also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.
5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP546 and BSP547/BSPA01.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2011 to Sept 2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for graduate membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Occupational Health and Safety Management |
Programme code | BSPT50 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/occupationalhealthandsafetymanagement/
and also the following: Entrance requirements to the programme: i) Possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution. Or iii) Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.
Exemptions Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by: i) The National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health (National or International Diploma) and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or ii) The British Safety Council Level 6 Diploma, and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or iii) another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSP540–BSP544 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.
The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
- enhance the career development and employability of participants;
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
- the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.
The following additional reference points also provide a benchmark for programme development, delivery and content:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the structure and application of occupational health and safety law;
- advanced risk assessment techniques;
- the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;
- the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
- the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
- the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;
- the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;
- establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;
- assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;
- critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;
- employ qualitative and quantitative skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety-related materials including journals, legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
- enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Modules
|
|
Module Weight |
BSP540 |
Occupational Health and Safety and the Law |
15 |
BSP541 |
Risk Management |
15 |
BSP542* |
Management of Physical Hazards |
15 |
BSP543* |
Occupational Health Management |
15 |
BSP544 |
Safety and the Management of People |
15 |
BSP545† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project |
45 |
BSP546† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project |
45 |
BSP514† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project |
60 |
BSP547†/BSPA01† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management Research Project |
60 |
* by distance learning
† partially by distance learning (>50%)
4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSP540, BSP541 and two others chosen from BSP542-544.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP540-545 inclusive.
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.
5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSP514 or BSP547/BSPA01.
Candidates must have also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved a module mark of not less than 40% in a further module with a module weight of 15.
5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSP546 and BSP547/BSPA01.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Occupational Health and Safety Management (Oct 2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/programmes/departments/business-economics/occupational-health-safety-management/ Holders of the Diploma or MSc satisfy the academic requirements for graduate membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Occupational Health and Safety Management |
Programme code | BSPT50 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is twenty-eight calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is seven and fourteen months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/occupationalhealthandsafetymanagement/
and also the following: Entrance requirements to the programme: i) Possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution. Or iii) Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.
Exemptions Students holding the diploma in Occupational Safety and Health as awarded by: i) The National Examination Board in Occupational Safety and Health (National or International Diploma) and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or ii) The British Safety Council Level 6 Diploma, and accredited by the QCA and the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health; or iii) another Higher Education Institute accredited by the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health may be admitted to the Programme and given exemption from modules BSPR10–BSPR14 inclusive, and given 75 credits transfer for their existing award. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The multi-disciplinary Postgraduate Programme in Occupational Health and Safety Management is aimed at professional health and safety advisors and managerial, engineering and scientific staff who have a significant responsibility for occupational health and safety.
The programme uses a combination of short courses and distance learning modules for part-time study.
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management progression in occupational safety and health in their chosen industry sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual, research and analytical abilities;
- enhance the career development and employability of participants;
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating;
- the academic basis for chartered membership of the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management . Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1) for a career development.
The following additional reference points also provide a benchmark for programme development, delivery and content:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of
K1 the structure and application of occupational health and safety law in the United Kingdom;
K2 advanced risk assessment techniques;
K3 the features and application of an occupational health and safety management system;
K4 the significant physical hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
K5 the significant occupational health hazards in workplaces and their respective controls;
K6 the relevance and application of human factors to occupational health and safety management;
Specific to the MSc:
K7 the uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1 identify and critically apply the legal framework to a complex range of occupational health and safety situations;
C2 establish criteria in respect of the tolerability of individual and organisational risk;
C3 assess a broad range of health and safety risks using complex tools;
C4 critically evaluate the effectiveness of any occupational health and safety intervention;
C5 learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1 influence the development of occupational health and safety policy;
P2 engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
P3 create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
P4 make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a health and safety context;
P5 employ qualitative and quantitative skills;
P6 conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of occupational health and safety- related materials including journals, legislation, approved codes of practice and recognised guidance.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
T1 create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
T2 scan and organise data and communicate knowledge;
T3 use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
T4 listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
T5 use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including written reports;
T6 interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
T7 manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
T8 enhance their career prospects and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Modules
|
|
Module Weight |
BSPR10 |
Occupational Health and Safety and the Law |
15 |
BSPR11 |
Risk Management |
15 |
BSPR12* |
Management of Physical Hazards |
15 |
BSPR13* |
Occupational Health Management |
15 |
BSPR14 |
Safety and the Management of People |
15 |
BSPR15† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project |
45 |
BSPR16† |
Occupational Health and Safety Management Evidence Based Practical Project |
45 |
BSPA01† /BSP547† |
Masters Research Project |
60 |
* by distance learning
† partially by distance learning (>50%)
To complete the PG Cert in Occupational Health and Safety Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules. To complete the PG Dip in Occupational Health and Safety Management students must complete 5 x 15 credit modules and a 45 credit practical project. Section 5 outlines the specific modules required for each degree award.
To complete the MSc students must complete 5 x 15 credit modules, a 45 credit practical project and a 60 credit research project.
4.2 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules, BSPR10, BSPR11 and two others chosen from BSPR12, BSPR13 or BSPR14.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with total modular weight of 120 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSPR10-15 inclusive.
5.1.3 Apart from circumstances detailed in 5.1.4, to be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements outlined in 5.1.2 and in addition, must have accumulated 60 credits from module BSPA01/BSP547.
5.1.4 Holders of recognized diplomas as detailed in Exemptions (see Admissions Criteria section above) to be eligible for the award of MSc, must have accumulated 105 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete modules BSPR16 and BSPA01/BSP547.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Security Management (DL) (pre-Sept 2007 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Security Management |
Programme code | BSPT52 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twenty-four calendar months. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/securitymanagement/
and also the following:
Entrance requirements to the programme are: i) Possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) Possession of the requisite security experiences gained within a working environment, as determined by the Programme Director.
Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Security Management may count a minimum of 45 credits towards the award of Diploma. Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management may count a minimum of 105 credits towards the award of an MSc. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To promote knowledge and understanding in the subject of Security Management.
- To provide advanced training where an opportunity is afforded for the security professional to bring together professional expertise and growing academic abilities.
- To promote security management as a serious subject for academic study within the security industry.
- To enhance the self-esteem of the participating students and to establish security management as a relevant discipline within the corporate environment in order that it might rank alongside other management disciplines.
- To assist individuals with career development, advancement of their professional competence and standing, and their lifelong learning.
- To provide an opportunity for security professionals from uniformed backgrounds to migrate into the corporate and private sector security domains.
- To provide a unique academic qualification in security management, that brings together professional expertise and academic disciplines relevant to this interdisciplinary field.
- To assist with entry into security representative bodies, for example The Security Institute, Association of Security Consultants and to assist in gaining Fellow status.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1 B).
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of;
Organisational behaviour, managing organisational change, and how such concepts interact with the role of the security manager. Have a critical understanding of professional standards of behaviour and ethical conduct, together with security licensing arrangements via the Security Industry Authority framework. Students should also understand the due legal process and the key elements associated with a crime and various criminological perspectives. Additionally, an awareness of how the legal systems; criminal, civil and industrial tribunals impact on the work undertaken by the security professional. Students must also understand the nuances associated with operating within both corporate and criminal domains and have an appreciation of Human Rights legislation and its’ impact upon the security industry. The concept of pure risk, risk assessments, business continuity and contingency planning must be clearly understood. Students must have a clear understanding of the international standards to be applied in the fields of business continuity and contingency planning. Students will also gain knowledge of fraudulent activity, key principles of physical security (including closed circuit television) and of fraud prevention strategies. An appreciation of the Fraud Act 2006 and the new bribery and corruption act must also be in evidence. Data and Information Technology Security must also be understood including the relevant legal framework and countermeasures.
However the levels of knowledge and understanding are linked to the study programme undertaken, i.e. Postgraduate Certificate, Postgraduate Diploma or MSc.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand security management as both a practically and academically based profession that adds real value to an organisation’s effectiveness, including financial performance as opposed to being regarded as a general overhead cost. Students should also view security management not only in problem solving mode but conceptually. They should be able to conceptualise various security problems and appreciate the ramifications of various courses of action. But most important of all, the solutions on offer must be based upon credible evidence and graduates must be willing to challenge conventional wisdom.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand and debate the changing nature of organisations and critically analyse the nature of management and motivators within a security management context. They should also be placed in a position to understand and to apply financial appraisal systems. Students should also appreciate the importance of professional standards and ethical frameworks and workplace diversity within a security context. In addition to this they should appreciate the evolving nature of legislation, offender behaviour and be able to construct coping/preventative strategies for dealing with nefarious activity. They should appreciate the rudiments of pure risk, be able to analyse problems and offer up practical cost effective solutions. Students should be able to apply the various crime prevention theories in a practical setting and analyse logically crime statistics. They must be capable of devising policies and procedures to deal with physical, data protection and information technology security issues, these to include risk assessment, business continuity and contingency planning.
Student shouldgain an appreciation of computer related crime and the application of various security countermeasures. All students should be able to conduct and evaluate primary and secondary research in the field of security. Students are aware of the various security related international standards and their location and interpretation when policy documents have to be written.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to write a good quality academic essay in both a logical and coherent fashion in a variety of security related settings by making use of a variety of information sources. This skill set should prove invaluable when the security manager is detailing a business case to acquire additional resources.
The student will also be capable of critical analysis of source material and have the ability to work to a pre-set timescale, and independently of others, in an organised fashion. An ability to manage time efficiently, must also be demonstrated.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight of 15)
|
|
Module Weight |
BSP551* |
Business Management Skills |
15 |
4.2 Optional Subjects
BSP552* |
Law and Criminology |
15 |
BSP553* |
Physical Security and Fraud and Information Security |
15 |
BSP554* |
Information Technology Security |
15 |
BSP555* |
Security Risk Management |
15 |
BSP556* |
Certificate Work-Based Assignment |
15 |
BSP557* |
Diploma Project |
45 |
4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight of 60)
BSP558* |
Masters Project |
60 |
* by Distance Learning
4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available. Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.
4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
4.6 Exemptions
If applicants possess certain prior qualifications they may be considered for exemption from some modules.
(i) Consideration for exemption from BSP552 will be given if candidates have a first degree in law from a UK University.
(ii) Applicants possessing a recognised Diploma in Security Management, from another UK University, may be considered for the Masters with exemption from certain modules, providing the final award totals 180 credits.
(iii) Exemption from the compulsory modules, BSP551 and BSP558 will not normally be granted.
(iv) Any exemptions to be offered must be at the final discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching).
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), two optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 30 credits) and the Certificate Work-Based Assignment (modular weight 15 credits). This specific requirement may be waived at the discretion of the Programme Director.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits) and the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits).
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in one further module with a total module weight of 15.
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 180. Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits), the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits). In addition the candidate must complete the Masters Project module listed in 4.3.
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in one further module with a total module weight of 15.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Security Management (DL) (Sept 2007- Aug 2009 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Security Management |
Programme code | BSPT52 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and twenty-four calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/securitymanagement/
and also the following:
Entrance requirements to the programme are: i) Possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) Possession of the requisite security experiences gained within a working environment, as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.
Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Security Management may count a minimum of 45 credits towards the award of Diploma. Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management may count a minimum of 105 credits towards the award of an MSc. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To promote knowledge and understanding in the subject of Security Management.
- To provide advanced training where an opportunity is afforded for the security professional to bring together professional expertise and growing academic abilities.
- To promote security management as a serious subject for academic study within the security industry.
- To enhance the self-esteem of the participating students and to establish security management as a relevant discipline within the corporate environment in order that it might rank alongside other management disciplines.
- To assist individuals with career development, advancement of their professional competence and standing, and their lifelong learning.
- To provide an opportunity for security professionals from uniformed backgrounds to migrate into the corporate and private sector security domains.
- To provide a unique academic qualification in security management, that brings together professional expertise and academic disciplines relevant to this interdisciplinary field.
- To assist with entry into security representative bodies, for example The Security Institute, Association of Security Consultants and to assist in gaining Fellow status.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1 B).
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of;
Organisational behaviour, managing organisational change, and how such concepts interact with the role of the security manager. Have a critical understanding of professional standards of behaviour and ethical conduct, together with security licensing arrangements via the Security Industry Authority framework. Students should also understand the due legal process and the key elements associated with a crime and various criminological perspectives. Additionally, an awareness of how the legal systems; criminal, civil and industrial tribunals impact on the work undertaken by the security professional. Students must also understand the nuances associated with operating within both corporate and criminal domains and have an appreciation of Human Rights legislation and its’ impact upon the security industry. The concept of pure risk, risk assessments, business continuity and contingency planning must be clearly understood. Students must have a clear understanding of the international standards to be applied in the fields of business continuity and contingency planning. Students will also gain knowledge of fraudulent activity, key principles of physical security (including closed circuit television) and of fraud prevention strategies. An appreciation of the Fraud Act 2006 and the new bribery and corruption act must also be in evidence. Data and Information Technology Security must also be understood including the relevant legal framework and countermeasures.
However the levels of knowledge and understanding are linked to the study programme undertaken, i.e. Postgraduate Certificate, Postgraduate Diploma or MSc.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand security management as both a practically and academically based profession that adds real value to an organisation’s effectiveness, including financial performance as opposed to being regarded as a general overhead cost. Students should also view security management not only in problem solving mode but conceptually. They should be able to conceptualise various security problems and appreciate the ramifications of various courses of action. But most important of all, the solutions on offer must be based upon credible evidence and graduates must be willing to challenge conventional wisdom.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand and debate the changing nature of organisations and critically analyse the nature of management and motivators within a security management context. They should also be placed in a position to understand and to apply financial appraisal systems. Students should also appreciate the importance of professional standards and ethical frameworks and workplace diversity within a security context. In addition to this they should appreciate the evolving nature of legislation, offender behaviour and be able to construct coping/preventative strategies for dealing with nefarious activity. They should appreciate the rudiments of pure risk, be able to analyse problems and offer up practical cost effective solutions. Students should be able to apply the various crime prevention theories in a practical setting and analyse logically crime statistics. They must be capable of devising policies and procedures to deal with physical, data protection and information technology security issues, these to include risk assessment, business continuity and contingency planning.
Student shouldgain an appreciation of computer related crime and the application of various security countermeasures. All students should be able to conduct and evaluate primary and secondary research in the field of security. Students are aware of the various security related international standards and their location and interpretation when policy documents have to be written.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to write a good quality academic essay in both a logical and coherent fashion in a variety of security related settings by making use of a variety of information sources. This skill set should prove invaluable when the security manager is detailing a business case to acquire additional resources.
The student will also be capable of critical analysis of source material and have the ability to work to a pre-set timescale, and independently of others, in an organised fashion. An ability to manage time efficiently, must also be demonstrated.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight of 15)
|
|
Module Weight |
BSP551* |
Business Management Skills |
15 |
4.2 Optional Subjects
BSP552* |
Law and Criminology |
15 |
BSP553* |
Physical Security and Fraud and Information Security |
15 |
BSP554* |
Information Technology Security |
15 |
BSP555* |
Security Risk Management |
15 |
BSP557* |
Diploma Project |
45 |
4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight of 60)
BSP558* |
Masters Project |
60 |
* by Distance Learning
4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available. Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.
4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
4.6 Exemptions
If applicants possess certain prior qualifications they may be considered for exemption from some modules.
5.1 Consideration for exemption from BSP552 will be given if candidates have a first degree in law from a UK University.
5.2 Applicants possessing a recognised Diploma in Security Management, from another UK University, may be considered for the Masters with exemption from certain modules, providing the final award totals 180 credits.
5.3 Exemption from the compulsory modules, BSP551 and BSP558 will not normally be granted.
5.4 Any exemptions to be offered must be at the final discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching).
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete and achieve credit in BSP551, BSP553, BSP554 and BSP555.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits) and the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits).
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 15.
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 180. Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits), the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits). In addition the candidate must complete the Masters Project module listed in 4.3.
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in one further module with a total module weight of 15.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Security Management (DL) (Sept 2009- Aug 2010)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Security Management |
Programme code | BSPT52 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is sixteen and twenty-four calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/securitymanagement/
and also the following:
Entrance requirements to the programme are: i) Possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution. Or iii) Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education.
Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Security Management may count a minimum of 60 credits towards the award of Diploma. Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management may count a minimum of 105 credits towards the award of an MSc. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To promote knowledge and understanding in the subject of Security Management.
- To provide advanced training where an opportunity is afforded for the security professional to bring together professional expertise and growing academic abilities.
- To promote security management as a serious subject for academic study within the security industry.
- To enhance the self-esteem of the participating students and to establish security management as a relevant discipline within the corporate environment in order that it might rank alongside other management disciplines.
- To assist individuals with career development, advancement of their professional competence and standing, and their lifelong learning.
- To provide an opportunity for security professionals from uniformed backgrounds to migrate into the corporate and private sector security domains.
- To provide a unique academic qualification in security management, that brings together professional expertise and academic disciplines relevant to this interdisciplinary field.
- To assist with entry into security representative bodies, for example The Security Institute, Association of Security Consultants and to assist in gaining Fellow status.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1 B).
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of;
Organisational behaviour, managing organisational change, and how such concepts interact with the role of the security manager. Have a critical understanding of professional standards of behaviour and ethical conduct, together with security licensing arrangements via the Security Industry Authority framework. Students should also understand the due legal process and the key elements associated with a crime and various criminological perspectives. Additionally, an awareness of how the legal systems; criminal, civil and industrial tribunals impact on the work undertaken by the security professional. Students must also understand the nuances associated with operating within both corporate and criminal domains and have an appreciation of Human Rights legislation and its’ impact upon the security industry. The concept of pure risk, risk assessments, business continuity and contingency planning must be clearly understood. Students must have a clear understanding of the international standards to be applied in the fields of business continuity and contingency planning. Students will also gain knowledge of fraudulent activity, key principles of physical security (including closed circuit television) and of fraud prevention strategies. An appreciation of the Fraud Act 2006 and the new bribery and corruption act must also be in evidence. Data and Information Technology Security must also be understood including the relevant legal framework and countermeasures.
However the levels of knowledge and understanding are linked to the study programme undertaken, i.e. Postgraduate Certificate, Postgraduate Diploma or MSc.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand security management as both a practically and academically based profession that adds real value to an organisation’s effectiveness, including financial performance as opposed to being regarded as a general overhead cost. Students should also view security management not only in problem solving mode but conceptually. They should be able to conceptualise various security problems and appreciate the ramifications of various courses of action. But most important of all, the solutions on offer must be based upon credible evidence and graduates must be willing to challenge conventional wisdom.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand and debate the changing nature of organisations and critically analyse the nature of management and motivators within a security management context. They should also be placed in a position to understand and to apply financial appraisal systems. Students should also appreciate the importance of professional standards and ethical frameworks and workplace diversity within a security context. In addition to this they should appreciate the evolving nature of legislation, offender behaviour and be able to construct coping/preventative strategies for dealing with nefarious activity. They should appreciate the rudiments of pure risk, be able to analyse problems and offer up practical cost effective solutions. Students should be able to apply the various crime prevention theories in a practical setting and analyse logically crime statistics. They must be capable of devising policies and procedures to deal with physical, data protection and information technology security issues, these to include risk assessment, business continuity and contingency planning.
Student shouldgain an appreciation of computer related crime and the application of various security countermeasures. All students should be able to conduct and evaluate primary and secondary research in the field of security. Students are aware of the various security related international standards and their location and interpretation when policy documents have to be written.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to write a good quality academic essay in both a logical and coherent fashion in a variety of security related settings by making use of a variety of information sources. This skill set should prove invaluable when the security manager is detailing a business case to acquire additional resources.
The student will also be capable of critical analysis of source material and have the ability to work to a pre-set timescale, and independently of others, in an organised fashion. An ability to manage time efficiently, must also be demonstrated.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Subjects (total modular weight of 15)
|
|
Module Weight |
BSP551* |
Business Management Skills |
15 |
4.2 Optional Subjects
BSP552* |
Law and Criminology |
15 |
BSP553* |
Physical Security and Fraud and Information Security |
15 |
BSP554* |
Information Technology Security |
15 |
BSP555* |
Security Risk Management |
15 |
BSP557* |
Diploma Project |
45 |
4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight of 60)
BSP558* |
Masters Project |
60 |
* by Distance Learning
4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available. Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.
4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
4.6 Exemptions
If applicants possess certain prior qualifications they may be considered for exemption from some modules.
(i) Consideration for exemption from BSP552 will be given if candidates have a first degree in law from a UK University.
(ii) Applicants possessing a recognised Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management, from another UK University, may be considered for the Masters with exemption from certain modules, providing the final award totals 180 credits.
(iii) Exemption from the compulsory modules, BSP551 and BSP558 will not normally be granted.
(iv) Any exemptions to be offered must be at the final discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching).
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:.
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete and achieve credit in BSP551, BSP553, BSP554 and BSP555.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits) and the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits).
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 105 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in further modules with a total module weight of 15.
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 180. Specifically, candidates must have completed the compulsory module listed in 4.1 (modular weight 15 credits), four optional modules from those listed in 4.2 (modular weight 60 credits), the Diploma Project (modular weight 45 credits). In addition the candidate must complete the Masters Project module listed in 4.3.
Candidates must also have accumulated at least 165 credits and achieved module marks of not less than 40% in one further module with a total module weight of 15.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Security Management (DL) (Sept 2010 - 2015 entries)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Security Management |
Programme code | BSPT52 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty-six calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Certificate or Postgraduate Diploma is twelve and twenty-four calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See: http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/securitymanagement/
And also the following:
1.1 Entrance requirements to the programme are: i) Possession of a degree or equivalent Or ii) Have achieved the academic requirements for corporate membership of a British Chartered professional institution. Or iii) Hold any other relevant qualification or professional experience as determined by the Programme Director together with a reasonable level of formal academic education. Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Certificate in Security Management may count a minimum of 60 credits towards the award of Diploma. Candidates who were awarded the ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management may count a minimum of 100 credits towards the award of an MSc. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To promote knowledge and understanding in the subject of Security Management.
- To provide advanced training where an opportunity is afforded for the security professional to bring together professional expertise and growing academic abilities.
- To promote security management as a serious subject for academic study within the security industry.
- To enhance the self-esteem of the participating students and to establish security management as a relevant discipline within the corporate environment in order that it might rank alongside other management disciplines.
- To assist individuals with career development, advancement of their professional competence and standing, and their lifelong learning.
- To provide an opportunity for security professionals from uniformed backgrounds to migrate into the corporate and private sector security domains.
- To provide a unique academic qualification in security management, that brings together professional expertise and academic disciplines relevant to this interdisciplinary field.
- To assist with entry into security representative bodies, for example The Security Institute, Association of Security Consultants and to assist in gaining Fellow status.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
The Programme conforms to the benchmarks published by the Quality Assurance Agency for Higher Education in respect of Masters awards in business and management in 2002. Specifically the programme meets the requirements of a specialist Masters degree (Type 1 B).
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of;
Organisational behaviour, managing organisational change, and how such concepts interact with the role of the security manager. Have a critical understanding of professional standards of behaviour and ethical conduct, together with security licensing arrangements via the Security Industry Authority framework. Students should also understand the due legal process and the key elements associated with a crime and various criminological perspectives. Additionally, an awareness of how the legal systems; criminal, civil and industrial tribunals impact on the work undertaken by the security professional. Students must also understand the nuances associated with operating within both corporate and criminal domains and have an appreciation of Human Rights legislation and its’ impact upon the security industry. The concept of pure risk, risk assessments, business continuity and contingency planning must be clearly understood. Students must have a clear understanding of the international standards to be applied in the fields of business continuity and contingency planning. Students will also gain knowledge of fraudulent activity, key principles of physical security (including closed circuit television) and of fraud prevention strategies. An appreciation of the Fraud Act 2006 and the new bribery and corruption act must also be in evidence. Data and Information Technology Security must also be understood including the relevant legal framework and countermeasures.
However the levels of knowledge and understanding are linked to the study programme undertaken, i.e. Postgraduate Certificate, Postgraduate Diploma or MSc.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand security management as both a practically and academically based profession that adds real value to an organisation’s effectiveness, including financial performance as opposed to being regarded as a general overhead cost. Students should also view security management not only in problem solving mode but conceptually. They should be able to conceptualise various security problems and appreciate the ramifications of various courses of action. But most important of all, the solutions on offer must be based upon credible evidence and graduates must be willing to challenge conventional wisdom.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to understand and debate the changing nature of organisations and critically analyse the nature of management and motivators within a security management context. They should also be placed in a position to understand and to apply financial appraisal systems. Students should also appreciate the importance of professional standards and ethical frameworks and workplace diversity within a security context. In addition to this they should appreciate the evolving nature of legislation, offender behaviour and be able to construct coping/preventative strategies for dealing with nefarious activity. They should appreciate the rudiments of pure risk, be able to analyse problems and offer up practical cost effective solutions. Students should be able to apply the various crime prevention theories in a practical setting and analyse logically crime statistics. They must be capable of devising policies and procedures to deal with physical, data protection and information technology security issues, these to include risk assessment, business continuity and contingency planning.
Student should gain an appreciation of computer related crime and the application of various security countermeasures. All students should be able to conduct and evaluate primary and secondary research in the field of security. Students are aware of the various security related international standards and their location and interpretation when policy documents have to be written.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to write a good quality academic essay in both a logical and coherent fashion in a variety of security related settings by making use of a variety of information sources. This skill set should prove invaluable when the security manager is detailing a business case to acquire additional resources.
The student will also be capable of critical analysis of source material and have the ability to work to a pre-set timescale, and independently of others, in an organised fashion. An ability to manage time efficiently, must also be demonstrated.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Modules
4.1 Compulsory Modules (total module weight of 60)
Module Weight |
||
BSP563* |
Physical Security and Fraud and Information Security |
20 |
BSP564* |
The Management of Computer Related Crime |
20 |
BSP565* |
Security Risk Management |
20 |
4.2 Optional Modules (total module weight of 60)
Module Weight |
||
BSP996* | Crime Investigation Management Skills |
20 |
BSP561* |
Business Management Skills |
20 |
BSP562* |
Law and Criminology |
20 |
BSP566* |
Research Methodology |
20 |
4.3 MSc Subjects (total modular weight of 60)
BSP558* |
Masters Project |
60 |
* by Distance Learning
4.4 The choice of optional subjects will be made from those available. Information on the up-to-date position is available from the School of Business and Economics.
4.5 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module see the Module Specification.
4.6 Exemptions
If applicants possess certain prior qualifications they may be considered for exemption from some modules.
.1 Consideration for exemption from BSP562 will be given if candidates have a first degree in law from a UK University.
.2 Applicants possessing a recognised Postgraduate Diploma in Security Management, from another UK University, may be considered for the Masters with exemption from certain modules, providing the final award totals 180 credits.
.3 Exemption from the compulsory module BSP558 will not be granted.
.4 Any exemptions to be offered must be at the final discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching).
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for an award, candidates must not only satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also:
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must complete and achieve credit in BSP563, BSP564 and BSP565.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have satisfied all the requirements for the Postgraduate Diploma and in addition must have accumulated 60 credits from the modules listed in 4.3.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Strategic Automotive Dealership Management (Sept 2004 to Aug 2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institute of the Motor Industry |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Strategic Automotive Dealership Management |
Programme code | BSPT30 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty three calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See; http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/strategicautomotivedealershipmanagement/
And the following: Requirements are those referred to in Regulation XXI. In addition, admission to the programme will normally be restricted to Dealer Principals and Senior Managers who have at least 5 years managerial experience, or new entrants to the automotive industry with a first degree. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and develop participants management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- develop participants’ automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to further develop their contribution towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme is delivered through a combination of short lectures, individual and group exercises, workshops, and practical sessions. The modules are highly participative encouraging students to contribute to class discussions and to share personal experiences and concerns with fellow students. Students are also strongly encouraged to consider situations within their own work environments.
The Programme Director acts in the capacity of a personal tutor and provides students with advice and guidance on academic progress. Further support/pastoral help is provided by support staff in the CAM team. Students are required to work both individually and within groups for both study and assessment. A programme handbook is available to each student at the beginning of the programme. The handbook sets out general advice on study, key regulations on assessment, programme regulations and module specifications for all modules available for study. At each module, further information is provided including a module outline which details the lecture schedule and associated reading guidance.
Constructive criticism is provided to students on coursework assignments throughout the programme.
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
- The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
- The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
- The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
- The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
- The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
- The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
- The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
- The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
- establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
- use of models of business situations and research skills;
- identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
- recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
- conduct research into business and management issues;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
- perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
- use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
- employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
- demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
- set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning
4. Programme structure
4.1 Modules (total modular weight 180)
|
Modular Weight |
|
BSP730 |
Foundations of Management |
15 |
BSP732/BSPN03 |
Strategic Dealership Management |
15 |
BSP734†/BSPN02† |
Work Based Assignment 1 |
15 |
BSP736†/BSPN05† |
Work Based Assignment 2 |
15 |
BSP742†/BSPN11† |
Work Based Assignment 3 |
15 |
BSP743/BSPN08 |
Financial Management. |
15 |
BSP744† |
Project |
60 |
BSP746/BSPN04 |
Retail Marketing Strategy |
15 |
BSP747/BSPN06 |
Strategic Human Resource Management |
15 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
To complete the PG Cert in Strategic Auto Dealership Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules. To complete the PG Dip in Strategic Auto Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules. To complete the MSc in Strategic Auto Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules and a 60 credit project.
4.2 The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
4.3 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module, see the module specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Strategic Automotive Dealership Management (Sept 2014 and 2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institute of the Motor Industry |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Strategic Automotive Dealership Management |
Programme code | BSPT30 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty three calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See; http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/strategicautomotivedealershipmanagement/
And the following: Requirements are those referred to in Regulation XXI. Whilst previous formal qualifications are not required, admission to the programme will normally be restricted to Dealer Principals, Senior Managers and managers aspiring to a senior role in the automotive industry. Entrants will need a minimum of 5 years managerial experience at an appropriate level. New entrants to the automotive industry who possess a first degree (with Second Class Honours or equivalent) from a UK or recognised overseas University will also be considered. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and develop participants management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- develop participants’ automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to further develop their contribution towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry
- provide a global perspective on the automotive sector.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme is delivered through a combination of short lectures, individual and group exercises, workshops, and practical sessions. The modules are highly participative encouraging students to contribute to class discussions and to share personal experiences and concerns with fellow students. Students are also strongly encouraged to consider situations within their own work environments.
The Programme Director acts in the capacity of a personal tutor and provides students with advice and guidance on academic progress. Further support/pastoral help is provided by support staff in the CAM team. Students are required to work both individually and within groups for both study and assessment. A programme handbook is available to each student at the beginning of the programme. The handbook sets out general advice on study, key regulations on assessment, programme regulations and module specifications for all modules available for study. At each module, further information is provided including a module outline which details the lecture schedule and associated reading guidance.
Constructive criticism is provided to students on coursework assignments throughout the programme.
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
K1. The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
K2. The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
K3. The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
K4. The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management and the impact of these technologies on the business.
K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
K9. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
K10. The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships;
K11. To develop an understanding of the automotive sector on a global basis.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
C3. use of models of business situations and research skills;
C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
C5. recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
C6. conduct research into business and management issues;
C7. learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
P2. perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
P3. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
P4. engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
P5. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
P6. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
P7. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
P8. conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
T1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
T2. organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
T3. use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
T4. listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
T5. use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
T6. demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
T7. set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
T8. interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
T9. manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 165)
|
Modular Weight |
|
BSP735/BSPN01 |
Information and Decision Systems |
15 |
BSP732/BSPN03 |
Strategic Dealership Management |
15 |
BSP734†/BSPN02† |
Work Based Assignment 1: Information and Decision Systems |
15 |
BSP736†/BSPN05† |
Work Based Assignment 2: Strategic Dealership Management |
15 |
BSP742†/BSPN11† |
Work Based Assignment 3: Contemporary Issues |
15 |
BSP743/BSPN08 |
Financial Management. |
15 |
BSP745†/BSPN12† |
Project |
30 |
BSP746/BSPN04 |
Retail Marketing Strategy |
15 |
BSP747/BSPN06 |
Strategic Human Resource Management |
15 |
BSP737/BSPN07 |
Leading Strategic Change |
15 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
4.2 Optional Modules (total modular weight 15 credits)
Modular Weight |
||
BSP738/BSPN09 |
Managing Enterprise and Innovation |
15 |
BSP739/BSPN10 |
Cross Cultural and international Management |
15 |
To complete the PG Cert in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules. To complete the PG Dip in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules. To complete the MSc in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 10 x 15 credit modules and a 30 credit project.
4.3 The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module, see the module specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Strategic Automotive Dealership Management (Sept 2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institute of the Motor Industry |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Strategic Automotive Dealership Management |
Programme code | BSPT30 |
Length of programme | The programme is normally offered on a part-time basis. The minimum period of study for the award of MSc is thirty three calendar months. The minimum period of study for the award of Postgraduate Diploma and Postgraduate Certificate is twenty four calendar months and twelve calendar months respectively. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | See; http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/postgraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/strategicautomotivedealershipmanagement/
And the following: Requirements are those referred to in Regulation XXI. Whilst previous formal qualifications are not required, admission to the programme will normally be restricted to Dealer Principals, Senior Managers and managers aspiring to a senior role in the automotive industry. Entrants will need a minimum of 5 years managerial experience at an appropriate level. New entrants to the automotive industry who possess a first degree (with Second Class Honours or equivalent) from a UK or recognised overseas University will also be considered. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and develop participants management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- develop participants’ automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to further develop their contribution towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry
- provide a global perspective on the automotive sector.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme is delivered through a combination of short lectures, individual and group exercises, workshops, and practical sessions. The modules are highly participative encouraging students to contribute to class discussions and to share personal experiences and concerns with fellow students. Students are also strongly encouraged to consider situations within their own work environments.
The Programme Director acts in the capacity of a personal tutor and provides students with advice and guidance on academic progress. Further support/pastoral help is provided by support staff in the CAM team. Students are required to work both individually and within groups for both study and assessment. A programme handbook is available to each student at the beginning of the programme. The handbook sets out general advice on study, key regulations on assessment, programme regulations and module specifications for all modules available for study. At each module, further information is provided including a module outline which details the lecture schedule and associated reading guidance.
Constructive criticism is provided to students on coursework assignments throughout the programme.
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
K1. The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
K2. The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
K3. The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
K4. The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management and the impact of these technologies on the business.
K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
K9. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
K10. The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships;
K11. To develop an understanding of the automotive sector on a global basis.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
C2. establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
C3. use of models of business situations and research skills;
C4. identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
C5. recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
C6. conduct research into business and management issues;
C7. learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
P2. perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
P3. use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
P4. engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
P5. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
P6. make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
P7. employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
P8. conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
T1. create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
T2. organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
T3. use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
T4. listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
T5. use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
T6. demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
T7. set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
T8. interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
T9. manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning
4. Programme structure
4.1 Compulsory Modules (total modular weight 180)
|
Modular Weight |
|
BSPN01 |
Information and Decision Systems |
15 |
BSPN03 |
Strategic Dealership Management |
15 |
BSPN02† |
Work Based Assignment 1: Information and Decision Systems |
15 |
BSPN05† |
Work Based Assignment 2: Strategic Dealership Management |
15 |
BSPN11† |
Work Based Assignment 3: Contemporary Issues |
15 |
BSPN08 |
Financial Management. |
15 |
BSPN12† |
Project |
30 |
BSPN04 |
Retail Marketing Strategy |
15 |
BSPN06 |
Strategic Human Resource Management |
15 |
BSPN07 |
Leading Strategic Change |
15 |
BSPN66 |
Digital and Social Media in the Retail Car Market |
15 |
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
To complete the PG Cert in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 4 x 15 credit modules. To complete the PG Dip in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 8 x 15 credit modules. To complete the MSc in Strategic Automotive Dealership Management students must complete 10 x 15 credit modules and a 30 credit project.
4.3 The School of Business and Economics reserves the right to regulate the numbers of students studying a particular module.
4.4 For full details of the specific assessment requirements for each module, see the module specification.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI.
5.2 Candidates who have the right of re-assessment in a module may choose to be re-assessed in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Programme Specification
BS MSc Wealth Management
Academic Year: 2016/17
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XXI (Postgraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ (available soon)
- What makes ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | ÌìÌÃÊÓƵ |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | MSc/ PGDip / PGCert |
Programme title | Wealth Management |
Programme code | BSPT17 |
Length of programme | |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | First Degree and/or relevant professional qualifications and/or appropriate work experience |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The programme aims to:
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the wealth management sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for stakeholder roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisation;
- provide participants with the opportunity to foster participant’s understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects relevant to their organisations role within the financial services market;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- develop strategic thinking and analytical capability to support a financial services business in a consumer facing / retail context;
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
K1. The impact of contextual forces on organisations including ethical, economic, environmental, social and technological change issues;
K2. The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
K3. The concepts, processes and institutions in the production and marketing of goods and / or services; the management of resources and operations;
K4. The financing of the business enterprise: sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
K5. The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, HRM, change management;
K6. The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
K7. The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
K8. The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context to meet stakeholder interests;
K9. A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management;
K10. The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- manage creative processes in self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
- establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
- identify and evaluate appropriate leadership styles for situations;
- evaluate complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- apply leadership and performance management; selecting the appropriate style for situations;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
- employ numerical and quantitative skills including the use of models of business situations and qualitative research skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet as well as primary research;
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- scan and organise data; abstract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- use effective oral and written communication using a range of media including business reports;
- demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
- set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations and manage continued learning;
- enhance personal development and effectively contribute to the business aspirations of their organisation.
4. Programme structure
Core Modules
Code |
Module title |
Modular weight |
BSP970 |
Managing and Leading People |
15 |
BSP973 |
Financial Services Environment |
15 |
BSP974 |
Marketing of Financial Services |
15 |
BSP975 |
Information Management |
15 |
BSP976 |
Leading Successful Teams |
15 |
BSP977 |
Generating Customer Loyalty |
15 |
BSP978 |
Business Law and Practice |
15 |
BSP979 |
Strategic Management of Business |
15 |
BSP980 |
Practical Project |
45 |
Optional Modules (students may select one module from)
Code |
Module title |
Modular weight |
BSP971 |
Entrepreneurship and Professional Development |
15 |
BSP972 |
Financial and Performance Management |
15 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 In order to be eligible for the award, candidates must satisfy the requirements of Regulation XXI but also.
5.1.1 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Certificate, candidates must have accumulated at least 60 credits. Specifically, candidates must have completed BSP970, BSP971 or BSP972, BSP973 and BSP974.
5.1.2 To be eligible for the award of Postgraduate Diploma, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 120. Specifically, candidates must have completed the modules outlined in 5.1.1 and BSP975, BSP976, BSP977 and BSP978.
5.1.3 To be eligible for the award of MSc, candidates must have completed modules with a total modular weight of 180. Specifically, candidates must have completed the modules outlined in 5.1.1 and 5.1.2 and BSP979 and BSP980.